You are on page 1of 291

BS-380/BS-390 Chemistry Analyzer

Service Manual
© 2008-2015 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights
Reserved.

For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2015-05 (Version: 3.0).

Intellectual Property Statement


SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual.
This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not
convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others.
Mindray does not assume any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or
other rights of third parties.

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.


Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this


manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly
forbidden.

, , , , , are the
registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other countries.
All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes
without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party


Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be
liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.

Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in
the condition that:

 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this


product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;

 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements;

 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit diagrams,
calibration illustration list and other information to help qualified technician to maintain
and repair some parts, which Mindray may define as user serviceable.

i
WARNING:
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this
equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan.
Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human
health.

NOTE:
This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained
and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.

Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any
transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the
use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than
Mindray authorized personnel.

This warranty shall not extend to:

 any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or


accident;

 any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;

 any product of any other manufacturer.

Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to
Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:

 Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain
a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must
appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be
accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model
number, serial number, and a brief description of the reason for return.

 Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product
is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).

 Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by
Customer Service department.

ii
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co.,
Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building,Keji 12th Road South,High-tech
industrial park,Nanshan,Shenzhen
518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680

EC Representative
Name: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH (Europe)
Address: Eiffestrasse 80 D-20537 Hamburg Germany
Tel: +49 40 2513174
Fax: +49 40 255726

iii
iv
Preface
Who Should Read This Manual
This manual is geared for service personnel authorized by Mindray.

What Can You Find in This Manual


This manual covers principles, installation procedures, theories, maintenance and
troubleshooting guidelines of the BS-380/BS-390. Please service the system strictly as
instructed by this manual.

Conventions Used in This Manual


This manual uses the following typographical conventions to clarify meanings in the
text.

Bold and Italic font indicates text displayed on the screen, such as Sample Request.

Safety Symbols

In this manual, the signal words BIOHAZARD, WARNING, CAUTION and


NOTE are used regarding safety and other important instructions. The signal
words and their meanings are defined as follows. Please understand their meanings
clearly before reading this manual.

When you see… Then…


Read the statement following the symbol. The
WARNING: statement is alerting you to an operating hazard
that can cause personal injury.

Read the statement following the symbol. The


BIOHAZARD: statement is alerting you to a potentially
biohazardous condition.

Read the statement following the symbol. The


CAUTION: statement is alerting you to a possibility of system
damage or unreliable results.

Read the statement following the symbol. The


NOTE: statement is alerting you to information that
requires your attention.

Labels Used On the System


The labels attached to the panels of the system use symbols to clarify the meaning of
the text. The chart below explains the symbols on the labels.

Preface 1
Serial Number

Date of Manufacture

Manufacturer

CE marking. The device is fully in conformity with the


Council Directive Concerning In Vitro Diagnostic Medical
Devices 98/79/EC.
Authorized Representative in the European
Community
The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU
member states only: The use of this symbol indicates that
this product should not be treated as household waste. By
ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent bringing potential negative consequences to
the environment and human health. For more detailed
information with regard to returning and recycling this
product, please consult the distributor from whom you
purchased the product.

In Vitro diagnostic equipment

Biohazard warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection

Warning: Risk of personal injury or equipment damage

Warning: risk of burn

Caution: laser radiation

Protective ground terminal

ON (Main Power)

OFF (Main Power)

ON (Power)

OFF (Power)

COM Serial Port

HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste
WASTE
HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste sensor
WASTE SENSOR

2 Preface
LOW CONC.
High-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 1
LOW CONC.
Normal-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 2
WASH
Wash solution
SOLUTION
WASH
SOLUTION Wash solution sensor
SENSOR
DEIONIZED
Deionized water
WATER
Model:
Product model
BS-380/BS-390

Graphics
All graphics, including screens and printout, are for illustration purposes only and must
not be used for any other purpose.

Preface 3
Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when using the BS-380/BS-390 Chemistry
Analyzer. Ignoring any of these safety precautions may lead to personal injury or
equipment damage.

WARNING:
If the system is used in a manner not specified by Mindray, the
protection provided by the system may be impaired.

Preventing Electric Shock


Please observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.

WARNING:
When the Main Power is on, users must not open the back cover or side
cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the analyzer may cause equipment
failure and even electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the
analyzer. In case of spillage, switch off the power immediately, remove
the spillage.

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts


Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by moving
parts.

WARNING:
Do not touch such moving parts as sample probe, reagent probe, mixer
and wash probe, when the system is in operation.
Do not touch the sample probe or mixer while the system is in operation.
Make sure the reagent disk cover is properly installed.

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp


Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by
photometer lamp.

WARNING:
Light sent by the photometer lamp may hurt your eyes. Do not stare
into the lamp when the system is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the lamp
and then wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp to cool down before
touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you may get
burned.

4 Preface
Preventing Laser Radiation
Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by laser
radiation.

CAUTION:
Light sent by the bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not stare into
the laser beam from the bar code reader.

Preventing Infection
Please observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection.

BIOHAZARD:
Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to
biohazardous infection. Do not touch the sample, mixture or waste with
your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow
standard laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.

Handling Reagents and Wash Solution

WARNING:
Reagents, concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution
are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution when using the
reagents, concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution. In
case your skin or clothes contact the reagents or wash solution, wash
them off with soap and clean water. In case the reagents or wash
solution spill into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an
oculist.

Treating Waste Liquids


Please observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and
personal injury caused by waste.

BIOHAZARD:
Some substances in reagent, control, enhanced wash solution and
waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose
of them in accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of
the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

Treating Waste Analyzer


Please observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.

Preface 5
WARNING:
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations.
Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for waste disposal.

Preventing Fire or Explosion


Please observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.

WARNING:
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using the
ethanol.

6 Preface
Precautions on Use
To use the BS-380/BS-390 Chemistry Analyzer safely and efficiently, please pay much
attention to the following operation notes.

Intended Use

WARNING:
The BS-380/BS-390 is a fully-automated and computer-controlled
chemistry analyzer designed for in vitro quantitative determination of
clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine and CSF samples. Please
consult Mindray first if you want to use the system for other purposes.
To draw a clinical conclusion, please also refer to the patient’s clinical
symptoms and other test results.

Operator

WARNING:
The BS-380/BS-390 is to be operated only by clinical professionals,
doctors or laboratory experimenters trained by Mindray or
Mindray-authorized distributors.

Environment

CAUTION:
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by
this manual. Installing and operating the system in other environment
may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.

Preface 7
Preventing Interference by Electromagnetic Noise

CAUTION:
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do
not install devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around
the system. Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio
transmitters in the room housing the system. Do not use other CRT
displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may
generate electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong
electromagnetic radiation (e.g. mobile phones or radio transmitters), as
these may interfere with the proper operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation
of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in
a domestic environment may cause radio interference, in which case,
you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.

Operating the System

CAUTION:
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
use of the system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment
damage or personal injury.
Before using the system for the first time, run the calibration program
and QC program to make sure the system is in proper status.
Be sure to run the QC program every time you use the system,
otherwise the result may be unreliable.
Do not open the covers of the sample disk and reagent disk when the
system is in operation.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is to be used for connection with
the operation unit only. Do not use it for other connections. Only use the
supplied cable for the connection.
The operation unit is a personal computer with the BS-380/BS-390
operating software installed. Installing other software or hardware on this
computer may interfere with the system operation. Do not run other
software when the system is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not
use this computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet. If the
computer is infected by virus, please install anti-virus software to check
for and clear virus.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands
with chemicals.
Do not place the Main Power Switch and the power switch of the
analyzing unit to ON again within 10 seconds since placing them to OFF;
otherwise the system may enter protection status. If it does so, switch off
the Main Power and switch it on again.

8 Preface
Maintaining the System

CAUTION:
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
maintenance may lead to unreliable results, or even equipment damage
and personal injury.
To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not
too wet) cloth, soaked with mild soap solution if necessary, to clean the
surface. Do not use such organic solvents as ethanol for cleaning. After
cleaning, wipe the surface with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and unplug the power cord before cleaning.
Take necessary measures to prevent water ingression into the system,
otherwise it may lead to equipment damage or personal injury.
Replacement of such major parts as lamp, photometer, sample probe,
reagent probe, mixer and syringe plunger assembly must be followed by
a calibration.

Samples

CAUTION:
Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin,
or suspended matter; otherwise the probe may be blocked.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to
unreliable results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test
results, so a sample blank is recommended.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the
compositions of the samples and lead to unreliable results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the
sample open for a long period.
Some samples may not be analyzed on the BS-380/BS-390 based on
parameters the reagents claim capable of testing. Consult the reagent
manufacturer or distributor for details.
Certain samples need to be processed before being analyzed by the
system. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor for details.
The system has specific requirements on the sample volume. Refer to
this manual for details.
Load the sample to correct position on the sample disk before the
analysis begins; otherwise you will not obtain correct results.

Setting up the System

CAUTION:
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and
wavelength, follow the instructions in this manual and the package insert
of the reagents.

Preface 9
Reagents, Calibrators and Controls

CAUTION:
Use appropriate reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to performance characteristic of
the system. Consult the reagent suppliers, Mindray or
Mindray-authorized distributor for details, if you are not sure about your
reagent choice.
Store and use reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by
the suppliers. Otherwise, you may not obtain reliable results or best
performance of the system.
Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to
unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity
period.
Perform a calibration after changing reagents. Otherwise, you may not
obtain reliable results.
Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to
unreliable test results. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor
for details.

Backing up Data

NOTE:
The system can automatically store data to the built-in hard disk of the
PC. However, data loss is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical
damage of the hard disk. Mindray recommends you to regularly back up
the data to portable storage device.

Computer and Printer

NOTE:
Refer to the operation manuals of computer and printer for details.

External Equipment

WARNING:
Accessory equipment connected to the analogue and digital interfaces
must be complied with the relevant Safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC
60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Standard and CISPR
22 EMC of Information Technology Equipment Standard (CLASS B)).
Any person, who connects additional equipment to the signal input or
output ports and configures an IVD system, is responsible for ensuring
that the system work normally and complies with the safety and EMC
requirements. If you have any problem, consult the technical services
department of your local representative.

10 Preface
Contents
Warranty ..............................................................................................................................ii
Return Policy .......................................................................................................................ii
Preface .............................................................................................................. 1
Who Should Read This Manual .......................................................................................... 1
What Can You Find in This Manual .................................................................................... 1
Conventions Used in This Manual ...................................................................................... 1
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................. 4
Precautions on Use ............................................................................................................ 7
Contents ............................................................................................................. I
1 System Description .............................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 System Components ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 Functions .............................................................................................................. 1-2
2 System Performance and Workflow ................................................... 2-1
2.1 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 General .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System ........................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System .......................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System .......................................................... 2-5
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation ...................................................................... 2-6
2.1.6 Installation Requirements ........................................................................ 2-6
2.1.7 Optional Modules ..................................................................................... 2-7
2.2 Timing Principle .................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.2 Timing ...................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.3 Measuring Points ..................................................................................... 2-9
3 Installation Procedures ........................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Environmental Requirements ............................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Installation Requirements ..................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements .................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Power Requirements ............................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage Requirements ............................................. 3-3
3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities ........................................ 3-5
3.2.5 Connecting Water Treatment System ...................................................... 3-7
3.3 Installation Procedures ......................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 Tools......................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 Unpacking ................................................................................................ 3-7
3.3.3 Installing the Instrument......................................................................... 3-10
3.3.4 Installing ISE Module (Optional) ............................................................ 3-14
3.4 Startup Testing .................................................................................................... 3-16
3.4.1 Startup Initialization................................................................................ 3-18
3.4.2 Checking Cuvette & Lamp ..................................................................... 3-19
3.4.3 System Set up & Test ............................................................................ 3-19

Contents I
3.4.4 Checking Low Concentration Waste Drainage ...................................... 3-20
3.4.5 Exiting Software ..................................................................................... 3-20
4 Units and Modules ................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Enclosure .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Components ............................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.2 Remove and Install Enclosure ................................................................. 4-2
4.1.3 Remove and Install Side Plate................................................................. 4-2
4.1.4 Remove and Install Panel ........................................................................ 4-3
4.2 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit ................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Components and Structure ...................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Installation ................................................................................................ 4-6
4.3 Mixer Unit.............................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.2 Components and Structure ...................................................................... 4-7
4.3.3 Installation ................................................................................................ 4-8
4.4 Sample Disk Unit .................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.2 Components and Structure ...................................................................... 4-9
4.4.3 Servicing ................................................................................................ 4-10
4.5 Reagent Disk Unit ............................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-13
4.5.2 Components and Structure .................................................................... 4-14
4.5.3 Servicing the Reagent Disk Unit ............................................................ 4-15
4.6 Reaction Disk Unit .............................................................................................. 4-20
4.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-20
4.6.2 Components and Structure .................................................................... 4-21
4.6.3 Replacing Components and Parts ......................................................... 4-22
4.7 Photometric Unit ................................................................................................. 4-29
4.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-29
4.7.2 Components and Structure .................................................................... 4-29
4.7.3 Adjustment of Photometer ..................................................................... 4-32
4.7.4 Replacing Optical Assembly .................................................................. 4-38
4.7.5 Replacing PDA assembly ...................................................................... 4-38
4.8 Wash Unit ........................................................................................................... 4-41
4.8.1 Install and Service the Wash Assembly ................................................. 4-43
4.8.2 Install and Service the Wash Probe Syringe Assembly ......................... 4-43
4.8.3 Install and Service the Wash Preheat Assembly ................................... 4-43
4.9 ISE Unit (optional)............................................................................................... 4-43
4.9.1 Components and Structure .................................................................... 4-44
4.9.2 Install and Remove ISE unit .................................................................. 4-44
4.9.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes ....................................................................... 4-49
5 Hydropneumatic System ..................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Function Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System .................................................................. 5-3
5.4 Layout of Fluidic System ...................................................................................... 5-3
5.5 Layout of Fluidic System ...................................................................................... 5-4
5.6 Connectors and Tubing ........................................................................................ 5-5
6 Hardware ............................................................................................... 6-1

II Preface
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Safety Precautions................................................................................................ 6-1
6.3 Circuit boards........................................................................................................ 6-1
6.4 Layout of the boards ............................................................................................. 6-3
6.5 Detaching and Assembling Circuit Boards ........................................................... 6-4
6.6 Function of board .................................................................................................. 6-4
6.6.1 Control Framework .................................................................................. 6-4
6.6.2 Main Board .............................................................................................. 6-5
6.6.3 Three-disk Driver Board........................................................................... 6-6
6.6.4 Three-probe Driver Board ........................................................................ 6-7
6.6.5 Pre-amp Board ........................................................................................ 6-8
6.6.6 AD Conversion Board .............................................................................. 6-8
6.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board ................................................................... 6-9
6.6.8 Level Detection Board ............................................................................. 6-9
6.6.9 Pump/Valve Driver Board ........................................................................ 6-9
6.6.10 Reaction Disk Temperature Control Board .......................................... 6-10
6.6.11 Preheat Temperature Control Board .................................................... 6-10
6.6.12 Reaction Disk Heater Connection Board ............................................. 6-10
6.6.13 Simulate power connection board ....................................................... 6-10
6.7 Power Supply Module ......................................................................................... 6-10
6.7.1 Features of Power Supply Module ........................................................ 6-11
6.7.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 6-12
6.8 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................... 6-13
6.9 Board Indication Light ......................................................................................... 6-27
7 Service and Maintenance..................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Preparation ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Tools......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Wash Solution .......................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Daily Maintenance ................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.1 Checking Connection of Deionized Water ............................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Checking Waste Tubing ........................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes ....................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe........................................................... 7-4
7.2.5 Checking/Cleaning Reagent Probe ......................................................... 7-4
7.2.6 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ........................................... 7-5
7.2.7 Checking Printer/Printing Paper .............................................................. 7-5
7.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper .............................................................. 7-5
7.2.9 ISE Unit (optional).................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 Weekly Maintenance ............................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe ........................................................................... 7-6
7.3.2 Cleaning Reagent Probe ......................................................................... 7-7
7.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ........................................................... 7-8
7.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader Windows .......................... 7-9
7.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment .................................................... 7-10
7.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment ................................................... 7-11
7.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit......................................................... 7-11
7.3.8 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes .................................................................. 7-11
7.3.9 Checking Photometer ............................................................................ 7-12
7.4 Monthly Maintenance.......................................................................................... 7-16
7.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe................................................... 7-16
7.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Probe ................................................. 7-17
7.4.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers ................................... 7-17

Contents III
7.4.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor ............................................................... 7-18
7.4.5 Cleaning Reagent Probe Rotor ............................................................. 7-18
7.4.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors ............................................. 7-19
7.4.7 Checking and Maintaining Wash Unit .................................................... 7-19
7.5 Three-month Maintenance ................................................................................. 7-21
7.5.1 Washing Water Tank .............................................................................. 7-21
7.5.2 Washing Dust Screens .......................................................................... 7-22
7.5.3 Replacing Reaction Cuvettes (Whole Disk)........................................... 7-23
7.6 Six-month Maintenance ...................................................................................... 7-25
7.6.1 Replacing Check Valves ........................................................................ 7-25
7.6.2 Replacing First and Second Phase Washing Tubing on Wash Unit ...... 7-27
7.6.3 Replacing DI Water Filter ....................................................................... 7-27
7.6.4 Replacing Wash Solution Filter.............................................................. 7-29
7.7 As-Needed Maintenance .................................................................................... 7-30
7.7.1 Photometer Lens Maintenance.............................................................. 7-30
7.7.2 Unclogging Sample Probe ..................................................................... 7-31
7.7.3 Unclogging Reagent Probe ................................................................... 7-34
7.7.4 Replacing Sample Probe ....................................................................... 7-37
7.7.5 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe................................................... 7-38
7.7.6 Replacing Reagent Probe ..................................................................... 7-39
7.7.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers ....................................................... 7-39
7.7.8 Replacing Syringe Assembly ................................................................. 7-42
7.7.9 Removing Air Bubbles ........................................................................... 7-45
7.7.10 Replacing Lamp ................................................................................... 7-45
7.7.11 Replacing Reaction Cuvette (Individual).............................................. 7-47
7.7.12 Cleaning Liquid Pump.......................................................................... 7-49
7.7.13 Replacing Waste Tubing ...................................................................... 7-53
7.8 Maintaining ISE Module (Optional) ..................................................................... 7-53
7.8.1 Replacing Reagent Pack ....................................................................... 7-53
7.8.2 Replacing Electrodes ............................................................................. 7-53
7.8.3 Replacing Tubing ................................................................................... 7-54
7.8.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional) .................................................................... 7-54
7.9 Quick-wear Parts ................................................................................................ 7-55
8 Test and Maintenance Software .......................................................... 8-1
8.1 Basic Operations .................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 System Installation ................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Overview .................................................................................................. 8-4
8.1.3 Operating Commands.............................................................................. 8-5
8.2 Macro Instructions .............................................................................................. 8-13
8.2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 8-13
8.2.2 Detailed Operations ............................................................................... 8-13
8.3 Parameter ........................................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.1 Detailed Operations ............................................................................... 8-16
8.4 Application Cases ............................................................................................... 8-17
8.4.1 Running ................................................................................................. 8-17
8.4.2 Checking ................................................................................................ 8-17
8.4.3 Debugging ............................................................................................. 8-17
9 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Classification of Error Messages .......................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Corrective Actions ................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit ........................................................................ 9-4

IV Preface
9.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit ...................................................................... 9-14
10 Calculation Methods .......................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Reaction Types ............................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Endpoint ............................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Fixed-time ............................................................................................ 10-4
10.1.3 Kinetic .................................................................................................. 10-6
10.2 Prozone Check.............................................................................................. 10-10
10.2.1 Reaction Rate Method ....................................................................... 10-11

Contents V
For Your Notes

VI Preface
1 System Description

1.1 Overview
The BS-380/BS-390 is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer
designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum,
plasma, urine and CSF (Cerebrospinal fluid) samples. The BS-380/BS-390
Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer) and operation unit.

Figure 1-1 Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit

1.2 System Components


The BS-380/BS-390 has a throughput of 300 tests/hour for single- or double-reagent
analysis. Each working period is equivalent to 12 seconds. Structurally, the

1 System Description 1-1


BS-380/BS-390 realizes the “three-disk + two-probe + two-mixer with one rotor”
scheme, which means one reaction disk, one sample disk, one reagent disk, one
reagent probe, one sample probe, one sample mixer and one reagent mixer sharing
one rotor. The reagent probe aspirates and dispenses R1 and R2, and the two mixers
stir S (sample) and R2.The photometric system, which is composed of gratings and
diode array, perform photometric measurement to the reaction cuvettes that hold
sample/reagent mixture. When analysis is finished, the wash unit cleans the reaction
cuvettes during 8 phases.

Figure 1-2 System structure

1.3 Functions
The general working procedure of the BS-380/BS-390 is as follows:

1. All mechanical units are initialized.

2. The reaction cuvettes are washed during 8 phases.

3. The reagent disk rotates to R1 aspirate position, and reagent probe aspirates R1
from a bottle on the reagent disk.

4. When washed for 8 phases, the reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent
dispense position, and the reagent probe rotates to the reaction disk and
dispenses R1 to a cuvette.

5. R1 is incubated in reaction cuvette for several periods.

6. The sample disk rotates to the sample aspirate position, and the sample probe
aspirates designated amount of sample from specified sample tube.

7. The reaction cuvette with R1 dispensed rotates to the sample dispense position,
and the sample probe dispenses the sample in the reaction cuvette.

1-2 1 System Description


8. With sample dispensed, the reaction cuvette rotates to mixing position for stirring.

9. In case of double-reagent tests, when sample is dispensed, the reagent disk


rotates to the R2 aspirate position, and the reagent probe aspirates R2 from the
specified bottle on the reagent disk.

10. The reaction disk with sample dispensed rotates to the reagent dispensing
position, and the reagent probe dispenses R2 to a reaction cuvette.

11. With R2 dispensed, the reaction cuvette is carried to the mixing position for
stirring.

12. During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement
(absorbance reading taking).

13. The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished are washed when passing by
the wash unit.

Table 1-1 Functions of system units


Unit Name Description
Sample probe unit Aspirates and dispenses samples for all chemical
and ISE tests.
Sample Disk Unit 75 positions. Holds samples to be analyzed and
wash solution.
Reagent probe unit Aspirates and dispenses R1 and R2 for all chemical
tests.
Reagent Disk Unit 60 positions. Holds bottles containing reagents and
wash solution.
Reaction Disk Unit 72 cuvette positions. It provides an environment in
which sample reacts with reagents.
Reagent Stirs the mixture in reaction cuvette when R2 is
mixer dispensed.
Mixer unit
Sample Stirs the mixture in reaction cuvette when sample is
mixer dispensed.
Photometric Unit Performs photometric measurement (absorbance
reading) at 12 wavelengths with the gratings system.
Wash Unit Cleans reaction cuvettes during 8 phases.
ISE Unit(optional) Measures the concentration of Na+, K+, and Cl- in
serum, plasma and diluted urine.

1 System Description 1-3


For Your Notes

1-4 1 System Description


2 System Performance and
Workflow

2.1 Technical Specifications

2.1.1 General
 System

Random, multi-channel, multi-test

 System structure

Analyzing unit plus Operation unit (PC)

 Sample type

Serum, urine,plasma and CSF (Cerebrospinal fluid) samples

 Number of simultaneous measurements

29 double-reagent tests/58 single-reagent tests

 Throughput

300 tests/hour, or

450 tests/hour with ISE unit

 Analytical method

Endpoint, Kinetic, Fixed-time;

2 System Performance and Workflow 2-1


Supporting single-/double-reagent tests;

Supporting single-/double-wavelength tests

 Reaction time

Maximum of 10 minutes for single-reagent tests;

Maximum of 5 minutes for double -reagent tests

 Reaction temperature

37±0.1℃

 Test scope

Clinical chemistries, immunoassays, TDM (Therapeutic Drug Monitoring)

 Predilution

Dilution ratio: ≤150. Dilution is done in reaction cuvette.

 Operation mode

System and tests are configured via the operating software. Profiles and calculation
tests are allowed.

 Calibration rule

Linear (one-point, two-point and multi-point), Logit-Log 4p, Logit-Log 5p, Spline,
Exponential, Polynomial and Parabola

 QC(quality control) rule

Westgard multi-rule, Cumulative sum check and Twin Plot

 Data processing

Capable of storing and outputting various data and tables/graphs, and calculating
among different tests

 Dimensions

l×b×h:990 mm×693 mm×1135 mm.

 Weight

200 kg

 Emergent samples

Emergent samples can be inserted during measurement at any time.

 Network connection

Able to be connected with LIS (Laboratory Information Management System)

2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System


 Sample loading

2-2 2 System Performance and Workflow


Samples are loaded via the sample disk.

 Sample tube type

Microtube: Φ12×37mm, Φ14×25mm;

Blood collecting tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm,
Φ13 X 75 mm, Φ13 X 95 mm, Φ13 X 100 mm;

Plastic tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13 X 75
mm, Φ13 X 95 mm, Φ13 X 100 mm.

 Sample disk

Ordinary sample disk, including inner, middle and outer circles

 Sample positions on sample disk

75 positions, which include the positions for calibrators, controls, STAT samples,
deionized water and wash solution

 STAT sample

Emergent samples can be inserted during measurement at any time and then run with
high priority.

 Sample volume

2μl-45μl, with increment of 0.1μl

 Sample probe

One probe, which is capable of detecting liquid level and obstruction (in horizontal and
vertical directions), and of tracking liquid level

 Sample probe washing

Inside and outside of the probe are washed with carryover less than 0.1%.

 Sample entering mode

Bar code system, etc

Table 2-1 Specifications of sample bar code


Name Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF(interleaved 2 of 5), code128, code39,
UPC/EAN and Code93
Maximum bar 0.19mm
code density
Total length 3-27 digits
Bar code User-defined
format and
contents
Max. width of 55mm
bar code level
Min. height of 10mm
bar code label
Max. inclination ±5 degree
angle
Print quality No less than class C (ANSI MH10.8M)

2 System Performance and Workflow 2-3


Name Description
Wide and 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
narrow ratio

2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System


 Reagent loading

All reagents are loaded via the reagent disk.

 Reagent bar code

The reagent bar code is in conformity with the NCCLS standard and also compatible
with various application environments. The total length of reagent bar code is within
13-30 digits.

Table 2-2 Specifications of reagent bar code

Name Description
Symbology Codabar, I 2 of 5 (interleaved 2 of 5), code128, code39,
UPC/EAN and Code93
Maximum bar 0.25mm
code density
Total length 13-30 digits
Bar code User-defined
format and
contents
Max. width of 55mm
bar code level
Min. height of 10mm
bar code label
Max. ±5 degree
inclination
angle
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Wide and 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
narrow ratio

 Reagent refrigeration

Refrigeration temperature: 2-8℃

 Reagent dispensing

Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringes.

 Reagent types

1 to 2 reagent types, R1 and R2

 Reagent volume

20μl-350μl, with increment of 1μl

 Reagent disk

Ordinary reagent disk, including inner and outer circles, 60 positions in total

2-4 2 System Performance and Workflow


 Reagent bottle

60 reagent bottles can be held on the reagent disk. Each reagent position can hold
Mindray outer-circle 20ml/40ml and Mindray inner-circle 40ml bottles.

 Reagent probe

One separate probe, which is capable of detecting liquid level and obstructions (in
horizontal and vertical directions), and tracking liquid level

 Reagent probe washing

Inside and outside of the probe are washed with carryover less than 0.1%.

2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System


 Optical path of reaction cuvette

5mm

 Material of reaction cuvette

5mm×5mm×29mm, semi-permanent plastic reaction cuvette

 Number of reaction cuvettes

72

 Stirring method

Two mixers sharing one rotor, which stir when sample and/or R2 is dispensed
respectively

 Reaction liquid volume

150-360μl

 Photometric system

Static fiber transmission, and reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings,
Photodiode measuring each wavelength

 Wavelength

12 wavelengths, which are 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm

 Light source

12V, tungsten-halogen lamp, 20W

The light is transmitted through the fibers.

 Gratings type

Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings

 Wavelength accuracy

±2nm

 Minimum reaction liquid volume

150μl

2 System Performance and Workflow 2-5


 Photometric measurement method

Photodiode array

 Number of simultaneous wavelength for each test

One or two wavelengths

 Measurement range

0-3A; optical path: 10mm

2.1.5 Specifications of Operation


 Display

17” LCD , resolution: 1024×768

 Operating system

Windows XP (professional/home) SP1 or above, compatible with Windows 7 Home


Basic 32 bit or Vista

 Communication interface

RS-232

 Printer

Ink jet printer, laser printer (black-white) and stylus printer

 Input device

Keyboard, network and handheld bar code reader (optional)

 Output device

Display, printer and LIS host

 Storage device

Hard disk, USB port

2.1.6 Installation Requirements


 Power requirements

AC 100-240V (fluctuation of ±10%), 50/60Hz (fluctuation of ±3Hz)

 Power

< 1000VA

 Water consumption

< 7L/hour

 Operating environment

Storage temperature: 0℃-40℃, fluctuation<±2℃/H

Storage humidity: 30%RH-85%RH, without condensation

2-6 2 System Performance and Workflow


Above-sea-level height for storage: -400m~5,500m (1,060hPa~500hPa)

Operating temperature: 15℃-30℃, fluctuation<±2℃/H

Operating humidity: 35%RH-85%RH, without condensation

Above-sea-level height for operating: -400m~2,000m (1,060hPa~800hPa)

2.1.7 Optional Modules


 ISE(Ion Selective Electrode) module

 Output printer (Only for mainland China)

 Built-in sample/reagent bar code reader

 Water supply module (Outside mainland China, same as hereinafter)

2.2 Timing Principle


2.2.1 Overview
Figure 2-1 General Test Procedure of the BS-380/BS-390

2.2.2 Timing

2.2.2.1 Timing for Sample Probe


a. Washing inside and outside of the sample probe

b. Lifting up from the wash well

c. Rotating to top of sample disk

d. Lowering down to sample tube

e. Aspirating sample

f. Lifting up from sample tube

g. Rotating to top of reaction disk

h. Lowering down to reaction cuvette

2 System Performance and Workflow 2-7


i. Dispensing sample

j. Lifting up from reaction cuvette

k. Rotating to top of wash well

l. Lowering down to wash well

→ Go to next period

2.2.2.2 Timing for Reagent Probe


a. Rotating to top of reaction disk

b. Lowering down to reaction cuvette

c. Dispensing R2

d. Lifting up from reaction cuvette

e. Rotating to top of wash well

f. Lowering down to wash well

g. Washing inside and outside of the probe

h. Lifting up from the wash well

i. Rotating to top of reagent disk

j. Lowering down to reagent bottle

k. Aspirating R1

l. Lifting up from reagent bottle

m. Rotating to top of reaction disk

n. Lowering down to reaction cuvette

o. Dispensing R1

p. Lifting up from reaction cuvette

q. Rotating to top of wash well

r. Lowering down to wash well

s. Washing inside and outside of the probe

t. Lifting up from the wash well

u. Rotating to top of reagent disk

v. Lowering down to reagent bottle

w. Aspirating R2

x. Lifting up from reagent bottle

→ Go to next period

2-8 2 System Performance and Workflow


2.2.2.3 Timing for Mixer Unit
a. Rotating to top of wash well

b. Lowering down to wash well

c. Washing mixer

d. Lifting up from the wash well

e. Rotating to top of sample mixing position

f. Lowering down to reaction cuvette

g. Stirring reaction liquid

h. Lifting up from reaction cuvette

i. Rotating to top of reagent mixing position

j. Lowering down to reaction cuvette

k. Stirring reaction liquid

l. Lifting up from reaction cuvette

→ Go to next period

2.2.2.4 Timing for Reaction Disk


The reaction disk can hold 72 reaction cuvettes. During each period, the reaction disk
rotates counterclockwise, rotating and stopping for 3 times. It completes following
during 3 stops:

First stop: dispensing R2;

Second stop: dispensing R1 and stir sample;

Third stop: dispensing sample, stir reagent, and wash cuvette.

2.2.3 Measuring Points


Figure 2-2 Measuring Points for Single-Reagent Tests

2 System Performance and Workflow 2-9


Figure 2-3 Measuring Points for Double-Reagent Tests

2-10 2 System Performance and Workflow


3 Installation Procedures

3.1 Environmental Requirements


 The altitude height of the installation site should be -400m ~ 2,000m
(1,060hPa~800hPa).

 The system is for indoor use only.

 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level with gradient less than 1/200.

 The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to bear 350Kg weight.

 The installation site should be well ventilated.

 The installation site should be free of dust as much as possible.

 The installation site should not be in direct sun.

 The installation site should not be close to a heat or draft source.

 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.

 The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.

 The installation site should not be disturbed by great noise or power supply.

 The system should not be placed near brush-type motors and electrical contacts
that are frequently powered on and off.

 Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio transmitters near the system.
Electromagnetic waves generated by those devices may interfere with operation
of the system.

 Ambient temperature: 15℃-30℃, with fluctuation less than ±2℃/H.

 Ambient humidity: 35%RH-85%RH, without condensation.

3 Installation Procedures 3-1


 If the temperature or relative humidity does not meet the above-mentioned
requirements, be sure to use air-conditioning equipment.

 The analyzer should be installed near a drainage sewer.

3.2 Installation Requirements


3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements
Figure 3-1 Space and accessibility requirements

3.2.2 Power Requirements


 Power supply: AC 100-240V (fluctuation of ±10%), 50/60Hz (fluctuation of
±3Hz), 1000VA. Three-wire power cord and properly grounded.

 The system should be connected to a properly grounded power socket.

To check grounding:

1. Set universal meter to AC voltage scale, with measurement range to be greater


than 300V.

2. As shown in following figure, insert black and red pins into holes A and B separately.
The reading shall be the nominal voltage value (for example, 220V for mainland
China).

3-2 3 Installation Procedures


O

A B

3. Insert black pin into hole O, and red pin into holes A and B. If grounding is normal,
the reading of universal meter shall be 0V and the nominal voltage measured in
step2. Otherwise, it is considered as improper grounding. It is highly recommended
to correct.

 The distance between the power socket and the system should be less than 2.5
meters.

WARNING:
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding
may lead to electric shock and/or equipment damage.

Be sure to connect the system to a power socket that meets the


above-mentioned requirements and has a proper fuse installed.

3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage Requirements


 Water: The water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water. Specific
resistance shall not be less than 0.5(MΩ.cm@25℃).

 Water pressure: 50~392kPa, with peak no greater than 800kPa.

 Water flow: Continuous flow no less than 15L/hour.

 Water temperature: 5-32℃.

 The water used on the BS-380/BS-390 is supplied by a water treatment system.


The tubing between the analyzer and outlet of the water treatment system must
not exceed 10 meters.

To check water supply:

1. Check specific resistance and water temperature shown in water treatment


system.

2. Check water supply pressure and flow: before start up for the first time, turn on
water treatment system first. And then turn on main unit power and analyzing unit
power. If water supply connection is correct, it can be seen that water tank is being
filled with water when open front door of analyzing unit. Record how long it takes to
fulfill the water tank.

Using graduate instead of 15L tank to immit 450 ml water, and time to fulfill the
tank is t (unit: seconds), it is considered that water flow meets requirement when t is
less than 100 seconds. Otherwise, check if tubing is too long or bent.

3 Installation Procedures 3-3


This procedure shall be done when no other operation is carried out while analyzing
unit is powered on.

 The tubing between fluidic inlet and diluted wash solution bucket should be no
longer than 2m.

 The tubing between fluidic outlet and waste sewer should be no longer than 5m.

 The waste sewer must be higher than the ground within 100mm.

 The high-concentration waste bucket should be placed on the ground. The


tubing between the outlet on analyzer and the high-concentration waste bucket
must not exceed 2 meters.

To check water drainage:

1. Put high concentration waste tube and high concentration waste sensor into high
concentration waste bucket.

2. Stretch 2 low concentration waste tubes (thick and thin) into waste drainage sewer.
Note: Tube shall not be too long. Cut off the extra tube when tube is placed properly.
Make sure tube is not bent or clogged.

3. Low concentration tube1 (thick one) being placed improperly would probably lead
to “Low concentration waste overflow” failure occurring frequently during running of
test. While arranging tubing, the tube shall not exceed 5m; waste sewer shall higher
than the ground within 100mm; if waste sewer is higher than ground, adjust tubing
as shown in following figure, so as to ensure tube drops naturally.

4. After finishing installation testing as specified in 3.3, run waste draining checking in
maintenance screen of the operating software. If warning “Please check low
concentration waste tube1” is not prompted, waste drainage is normal.

5. After ensuring waste drainage is normal, fix low concentration waste tube to avoid
it being moved easily.

3-4 3 Installation Procedures


BIOHAZARD:

Be sure to dispose of the waste according to the local regulations.

CAUTION:

The water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water; otherwise
insufficiently purified water may result in misleading measurement.

3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities

NOTE:
When inserting tubes into connectors of high-concentration waste outlet
and wash solution inlet on the rear side of analyzer, please make sure it
is inserted properly and firmly. A clear sound during connection indicates
a proper connection. Otherwise, please insert again to prevent poor
connection.
High-concentration waste tube overflow may lead to wash unit overflow.
Poor connection of wash solution tube may lead to no water supplied to
phase 1 and phase 2 wash.

Figure 3-2 Standard Configuration

Figure 3-3 Optional Components

3 Installation Procedures 3-5


Note: DI water filter is installed between water supply module and water source, so as
to protect the water supply module and the analyzer.

NOTE:
When water supply module is configured, find the water inlet weight
block (as shown in following figure) from the accessories pack to
connect onto the inlet end of water inlet tube, so as to ensure the inlet
end sinks to the bottom of water.

3-6 3 Installation Procedures


Figure 3-4 BS-380/BS-390 Tubing Connectors

3.2.5 Connecting Water Treatment System


If the user employs a water treatment system to supply water to the analyzer, an
adapter is required to connect the irregular outlet tubing of the water unit to the
ID4mm×OD6mm tubing configured with the analyzer through which the inlet filter (or
water supply module) of the analyzer is connected.

3.3 Installation Procedures


3.3.1 Tools
 2 adjustable wrenches. The maximum caliber of one of the wrenches is above
Φ30.

 Allen wrenches of Φ2.5, Φ3 and Φ4.

 Wall paper scissors or other bit tool that can cut tubing.

 Philips screwdriver (diameter: 5 to 6 mm; to screw feet).

 Flat headed screwdriver (small sized; to adjust the adjustable resistance).

3.3.2 Unpacking
 Before unpacking, please check against packing list and see if packaging is
complete. There are another 4 cases besides PC and printer, which are analyzer
main unit, accessories pack, high concentration waste bucket, and wash solution
bucket.

 The gross weight of the analyzer is about 300Kg. It is recommended to use fork lift
to unload the instrument.

 Use adjustable wrench to loosen the screws to remove the top cover and side

3 Installation Procedures 3-7


plates.

 Use adjustable wrench to remove the 4 fixing brackets and all screws on the fixing
angle steel. Remove the angle steel.

 Use wide caliber adjustable wrench to remove the fixing nuts on feet bolts (4 in total).

3-8 3 Installation Procedures


 Use Allen wrench or screwdriver to rotate the feet to top. Diameter of the wrench or
screwdriver shall be within 5 to 6 mm, so that deformation will not occur.

 A slop ramp is fixed to the right side plate. Remove the retaining screws (2 in total) to
remove the ramp.

 Place the slop ramp on the side with hole on bottom plate. Fix the ramp with screws
removed from the packaging box.

3 Installation Procedures 3-9


 Adjust the direction and carefully push the analyzer to ground.

Note: Store all packaging plates and retaining screws properly. Remain for later use.

3.3.3 Installing the Instrument


 Fix the analyzer: after moving the analyzer to the installation site, rotate the four
screws of the analyzer to lift the analyzer above the floor and ensure the four feet
stand firmly on the ground.

 Remove the package and plastics (probes arms, syringes and wash unit).

 Install reagent and sample probes.

1. Take out sample and reagent probes from accessories pack. Pay attention to the
white gaskets in the package. Place the gasket inside the metal connector of the
probe. (Note: reagent probe gasket is larger than sample probe gasket.)

2. Remove probe arm cover: use the cross screw driver to loosen the two screws on
the cover(do not loosen them completely) and lift the arm cover.

3. Pull up the probe arm to vertically highest point. Remove probe retaining bolt and
spring on one end of the arm.

3-10 3 Installation Procedures


4. Install sample and reagent probes onto the arm. (Note: Make sure probe can
move vertically after installation.)

5. Connect the Teflon tube and probe. (Note: Pinch the metal probe connector with
one hand in the position shown in the figure, to avoid the probe welding point
failure.)

6. Connect probe leading wire with level detection board.

3 Installation Procedures 3-11


7. After installation, ensure probe base block has blocked the collision detection
sensor.

8. Fill the clean open container with DI water. Put the tip of the reagent probe 2-3
mm under the water level. The indicator D5 on the level sensing board will go
through a process of OFF-ON procedure. After the tip of the reagent probe is
taken away from the water, the indicator D5 will go off, which shows the function
of the board is normal. Proceed to the next step.

3-12 3 Installation Procedures


9. Install arm cover.

 Install mixer.

1. Take out mixer from accessories pack. Pull the mixer arm to the vertically highest
point.

2. Sleeve the mixer retaining nut to one end of mixer installation hole. Do not tighten.

3. Sleeve the mixer installation hole on mixer motor rotor. There shall be no
clearance between installation hole and motor rotor in vertical direction inside
the hole.

4. Tighten the retaining nut clockwise. Check if mixer is perpendicular. If not, please
install again.

 Checking Light Source Assembly

Loosen the screws on the back cover using a screw driver. Check the fixing conditions of
the lamp.

3 Installation Procedures 3-13


1. Make sure there is no gap between the lamp and its base. Check if the retaining
screws are loosening.

2. Check if the terminal is fixed. Make sure the wires are connected properly.

3. Reinstall the back cover after checking. Screw the screws manually, thus making the
lamp replacement become easier in the future.

 Connect hydro tubing according to instructions in 1.2.4. Dilute the concentrated


wash solution in dilution ratio of 10, and place into wash solution bucket.

Note: Diluted wash solution filter is included in accessories pack. It shall be placed
into external diluted wash solution bucket after installation personnel have
connected it into diluted wash solution tubing inlet.

 If UPS is equipped, install UPS and install UPS grounding wire.

 Connect analyzer main unit, PC, printer, water treatment system (or water supply
module). Note: Do not switch on.

Connect serial port cable between PC and analyzer main unit.

3.3.4 Installing ISE Module (Optional)


1. Open the ISE unit door on right side of the analyzing unit. Remove ISE module
cover.

2. Open the electrode from its protective packaging and remove the yellow insert
from the lumen of the reference electrode. Place the reference electrode inside
the housing by pressing down the compression plate and push it straight against
the back of the housing. Release the compression plate and ensure the
electrode cannot be easily moved. (Note: Do not dispose of the yellow insert,
since it is needed to be put back when storing reference electrode. For the
reference electrode, if necessary, soak the electrode in warm water until the
lumen of the electrode has been cleared free of salt build-up.)

3-14 3 Installation Procedures


3. Install other electrodes one by one into ISE module. Cl, K, and Na electrodes can be
easily inserted, while it is necessary to gently push the compression plate when
installing the spacer on top.

4. Check if all 5 electrodes have been installed correctly. Make sure they are aligned
vertically, with frontal sides of each electrode aligned.

5. Install the cover back. Close the ISE door.

6. Open the door in the middle. Take out the reagent pack adapter, remove the red cap
and keep it properly. Connect reagent pack as shown in the following figure. Push the
pack into ISE reagent compartment.

3 Installation Procedures 3-15


CAUTION:

After installing ISE electrodes, the ISE module shall be powered on all
the time. If power is off for more than half an hour, electrodes shall be
removed and stored properly. Refer to Operator’s Manual for details.

7. Remove the ISE plastic stopper in sample probe movement track on the right side
of the panel.

8. Go to Utilities-ISE. Select Purge Combination, and set for 25 times. Select


Execute. ISE module installation is complete until there is no air bubbles in the
tubing.

3.4 Startup Testing


 Turn on water treatment switch

 Turn on analyzer Main Power switch.

 Turn on analyzing unit power switch.

 Turn on PC. The operating software will run automatically. Log in as service
personnel. (The user name and password is restricted to service personnel. User
shall not be accessed to it. Advanced user name: bsmindray. Password:
MINDRAY#BS; For the closed reagent system, the user name is ChemMaintenance
and the password is Maintenance#Chem. ) Note: Select Quick Mode (to skip startup
initialization.).

3-16 3 Installation Procedures


Figure 3-5 Software logging in

 Choose Emergency Exit when log off (to skip shutdown procedure).

Figure 3-6 Shutdown

 Set the resolution to be 1024×768.

 Disable operating system standby and screen saver: Enter Screen Saver page on
Display Properties screen, and select None for screen saver setup. The select
Power button to enter Power Options Properties page for following setup:

3 Installation Procedures 3-17


Figure 3-7 Properties setup

3.4.1 Startup Initialization


 Run “BS380.exe” to start the operating software. It is recommended to log in with
service personnel account so as to facilitate service job. For users, it is only
allowed to log in with username of “Admin” and password of “MINDRAY”.

 Execute start-up initialization, during which Prime Water Tank/Probes/Mixers


and Prime Wash Unit will be run automatically.

CAUTION:

Any failure during the process of initialization will lead to system failure
status. Tests cannot be run until failures are troubleshooted. And then
execute initialization again.

There may be fresh water spilling onto the surface around the wash well
during Prime Water Tank/Probes/Mixers, wipe the water off with dry
and clean cloth.

 When priming for the first start-up, Prime Wash Unit may not be executed
completely. And it needs to be run again in following steps.

 Select Setup from the main screen, and disable the two options of Temperature
be Steady and Light Source be Steady. After saving the changes, ensure the
system is in Idle status. Execute Prime Wash Tubing immediately, or the system
will be in Incubating status. That is to say, it will be in Idle status after another 20
to 30 minutes when reaction disk temperature and light source are steady.

 Select an operation item and select Execute on the Daily Maint. page. The
Confirm dialog box pops up. Select the Prime Wash Unit option and the system

3-18 3 Installation Procedures


will run the priming operation automatically. Repeat the operation till there are no
bubbles from the wash tubing in phase 1 and 2.

Enter Setup screen, and enable the two options of Temperature be Steady and
Light Source be Steady. Save the settings.

1
3.4.2 Checking Cuvette & Lamp 1
 System enters Idle status after lamp has been stable for 20 minutes.

 Execute Cuvette/ Lamp Check, and select Cuvette Check button. Select Start.

 The checking will be complete after 20 minutes. Check if there are any cuvettes
highlighted in red. If yes, replace corresponding cuvettes.

 Select Lamp Check. Click Start.

The checking will be complete after 3 minutes. View and record results in installation
checking list.

3.4.3 System Set up & Test


 Set one test as “water”.

Figure 3-8 Parameters-Basics

3 Installation Procedures 3-19


Figure 3-9 Parameters-Calibration

 Assign reagent position for the test in Reagents screen.

 Request "water" test in Sample Request page and duplicates for 72.

 Load deionized water in assigned position of reagent disk as reagent for the test,
deinoized water and wash solution in position W and wash solution position
respectively for enhanced wash after test.

 Load deionized water in assigned position of sample disk as sample for the test,
deinoized water and wash solution in position W and wash solution position
respectively for enhanced wash after test.

 Select Start to start testing when system is in Idle status.

 Review test results after testing is over. If more than 90% of the results are within
-1.5 to 1.5, go to next step. If not, check cuvettes with over ranged results.
Troubleshoot and rerun. (Note: Check cuvettes with over ranged results. If there
are cases such as optical surface dirty, scratch, or broken, clean or replace
cuvettes.)

3.4.4 Checking Low Concentration Waste Drainage


If no such warning as “Low concentration waste overflow” is prompted during
previous procedure, check according to procedure specified in 3.2.3Water Supply
and Drainage Requirements. If checking passes, move on to next step. Otherwise,
check if low concentration waste tube 1 (thick) arrangement is correct.

3.4.5 Exiting Software


 Ensure the system is not in Testing status before shut down. Select Shut Down,
the Shut Down dialog box pops up as shown in Figure 3-6 Shutdown.

 Service personnel can choose Emergency Exit. Note: analyzer will not run
shutdown procedure under emergency exit. User can choose normal Exit. The
analyzer will run complete shutdown procedure, including turning off reaction disk
and DI water temperature control, and turning off lamp.

 Turn off analyzing unit power after exiting the operating software.

3-20 3 Installation Procedures


4 Units and Modules

4.1 Enclosure

4.1.1 Components
The enclosure protects the inner parts of the analyzer from damage and dust,
consisting of protection shield, panel, left/right side plate, middle door cover and rear
plate. See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Enclosure components

4 Units and Modules 4-1


Right plate
Rear plate2

Rear plate1

4.1.2 Remove and Install Enclosure


When servicing the inner parts and/or outside enclosure components, place the Main
Power and Power to OFF, and then operate in the steps shown in Figure 4-2.

CAUTION:
When removing and installing the enclosure, place the Main Power
and Power to OFF.

Figure 4-2 Removal and installation flow

Generally, it is not necessary to remove the protection shield and middle door cover,
since they do not hinder the removal and installation of other parts. Remove one end
of the spring, then the gemel assembly and retaining screws of shield support, to
remove the protection shield if necessary. Remove the door gemel to remove the
middle door cover.

Remove the retaining screws on the rear plate to remove it.

4.1.3 Remove and Install Side Plate


1. Open the rubber stopper on left side plate, and remove the screws between left
side plate and the instrument frame. (See Figure 4-3)

4-2 4 Units and Modules


2. Pull up the left side plate assembly till the hooks have exited corresponding holes.
Remove the plate.
3. Install the plate back in opposite steps.
4. Steps to remove and install right side plate are the same as that of left plate.

Figure 4-3 Connection between left plate and instrument frame

Frame

Left Plate

Screws

Rubber
Stopper

4.1.4 Remove and Install Panel


The panel consists of left panel, middle panel, right panel, wash position panel, frontal
enclosure and rear upper plate. See Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Panel components

4 Units and Modules 4-3


When removing the panel, remove the rear upper plate first. Remove the retaining
screws on rear upper plate to remove it.

CAUTION:
When removing and installing panel, keep probes and mixers from
bumping and injuring people. It is recommended to move the probes and
mixers to safe positions by hand.

Figure 4-5 Remove and install panel

1. Remove screw stopper on the panel.

2. Loosen the screws under the rubber stopper.

3. Remove the panel in the sequence shown in the figure.

4. Install the panel back in steps 3 to 1.

Adjust the gap between panels when installing.

4.2 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit

4.2.1 Introduction
The sample/reagent probe unit consists of the sample probe and reagent probe
assemblies, which are often called Two-probe Assembly.

The sample probe assembly includes sample probe, which aspirates sample from the
sample tube and then dispenses it into reaction cuvette. The reagent probe assembly
includes a reagent probe, which aspirates reagent and then dispenses it into reaction
cuvettes.

4-4 4 Units and Modules


Generally, both of the two probes are capable of detecting liquid level and obstructions
in the horizontal and vertical directions.

Additionally, the probes are also able to limit their mechanical motions or lock
themselves when power failure occurs.

The general workflow of the Two-probe Assembly is as follows:

1. Sample probe assembly: Wash wellSample aspirate positionSample


dispense position and dilute position on reaction disk/ISE sample entry port;

2. Reagent probe assembly: Wash wellReagent aspirate positionReagent


dispense position on reaction disk.

4.2.2 Components and Structure


The Two -probe Assembly consists of the drive part and the probe arms. See Figure
4-6.

The drive part supports the probe arm and drives the arm to move vertically or
horizontally, so that the sample probe and reagent probe move among different
positions.

The drive part includes the horizontal movement structure and vertical movement
structure. Both structures have stepper motors, timing belt wheel and timing belt.
Integrated with a bracket, the two structures finally drive vertically or horizontally the
probe arm via the spline shaft.

The probe arms are composed of the sample/reagent probes, liquid level detection
board, arm cover, etc., which are integrated by the arm base.

Besides the structural difference, the two probe assemblies differ from each other in
the horizontal motor bracket and liquid level detection board. See Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-6 Probe assembly

Probe arm

Probe

Horizontal
Movement
Structure

Bracket
Vertical
movement
structure

4 Units and Modules 4-5


Figure 4-7 Differences among the two probe assemblies

400ul Reagent
Level detection
probe level
boare PCBA
detection board
PCBA

Sample
probe Reagent
probe

BA38 horizontal motor


bracket (S)
BA38 horizontal motor
bracket (R)

(a) Sample probe (b) Reagent probe


assembly assembly

4.2.3 Installation
Figure 4-8 Installation of two probe assemblies

4-6 4 Units and Modules


1. Sample/Reagent probe assembly is mounted to the arm base with spring guide
pillar and collision-proof spring. Open probe arm cover, and remove the guide pillar
and spring to take out probe assembly.

2. Sample/Reagent probe arm assembly is fixed to probe driver assembly with 2


M3X12 socket head screws with spring washers. Remove the 2 screws to take out
probe arm assembly.

3. Sample/Reagent probe unit is mounted on the big board with 3 M6X16 socket head
screws with spring washers. Remove the 3 screws to take out probe unit.

4. Install the assemblies in opposite order.

Note:

1. Check if sample/reagent probe assembly vertical movement is smooth or not after


tightening spring guide pillar when installing sample/reagent probe assembly. If the
movement is not smooth, loosen the spring guide pillar to adjust. Otherwise,
sensitivity of probe vertical collision detection may be compromised.

2. Keep sample/reagent probe assembly surface clean during installation and removal
process.

3. Corresponding wiring and tubing shall be removed prior to assembly removal.

4.3 Mixer Unit

4.3.1 Introduction
The mixer assembly includes the sample mixer and reagent mixer sharing one rotor,
used to stir the reagent and sample in reaction cuvette.

Additionally, the mixers are also able to limit their mechanical motions or lock
themselves when power failure occurs.

Working positions of the mixer assembly: sample mixer wash well (reagent mixer wash
well) reaction disk.

4.3.2 Components and Structure


The mixer assembly consists of the drive part and the mixer arm. See Figure 4-9.

The drive part supports the mixer arm and drives the arm to move vertically or
horizontally, so that the mixers move among different positions.

The drive part supports the mixer arms and drives the arm to move vertically or
horizontally, so that the mixers move among different positions.

The drive part includes the horizontal movement structure and vertical movement
structure. Both structures have stepper motors, timing belt wheel and timing belt.
Integrated with a bracket, the two structures finally drive vertically or horizontally the
mixer arm via the spline shaft.

The mixer arm consists of a mixer, motor, motor gasket, enclosure, etc., which are
integrated by the arm base.

4 Units and Modules 4-7


Figure 4-9 Structure of mixer assembly

Arm

Rotation unit
Mixers

Bracket

Vertical
motion unit

4.3.3 Installation
Figure 4-10 Installation of the mixer assemblies

1. Mixer can be taken off by removing the locking nut.

2. Mixer motor is mounted on mixer arm base with 2 M2X4 cross pan head
screws with plain washers. Open arm cover, and remove the 2 screws to take
out the motor.

Note:

4-8 4 Units and Modules


1. When installing mixer, bind the end plane of mixer with motor’s protruding
surface, and tighten the locking nut.

2. Keep the mixer surface clean during installation and removal process.

3. Corresponding wiring shall be removed prior to the removal. When connecting


the wiring back, the wire bundle containing red wire is for sample mixer motor,
which should be connected to the motor on the inner side of the panel. And the
bundle containing blue wire is for reagent mixer motor, which should be
connected to the motor on the left side of panel. The blue wire should be
connected to red point marked on the motor.

4. Do not remove the screws indicated by the red circle in the figure above.

4.4 Sample Disk Unit


4.4.1 Introduction
The sample disk assembly holds the sample tubes and carries them to specified
positions for sample aspiration.

a. Holding sample tubes: Sample containers (tube, microtube, etc.) with samples
are placed on the sample disk, and then the sampling structure aspirates
sample and dispenses them into reaction cuvette.

b. Timely feeding: The sample disk must carry specified sample tube to the
aspirate position for aspiration according to the predefined timing. The sample
disk is driven by the drive part.

c. Sample identification: The sample disk must be able to identify the samples
automatically. This function is achieved by the bar code reader system.

4.4.2 Components and Structure


The sample disk unit consists of the sample disk, drive part, sample compartment
and bar code reader.

4 Units and Modules 4-9


Figure 4-11 Sample disk assembly on the analyzer

Sample disk: The sample disk holds the samples and in conjunction with the drive part
carries them to the aspirate position.

Drive part: The drive part drives the sample disk to carry samples timely to the aspirate
position.

Bar code reader: The bar code reader identifies the samples correctly by scanning the
bar code label on sample tubes.

Sample compartment: The sample compartment is used to shield the light beam sent
from the bar code reader and separate the sample disk from other components.

4.4.3 Servicing

4.4.3.1 Installing the Sample Disk Assembly


Figure 4-12 Sample disk assembly structure

4-10 4 Units and Modules


a. Set the sample disk components on the drive part from top to down, ensuring
the pins on the drive part are aligned correctly to the holes on upper sample
disk.

b. Tighten the spring screws on the upper sample disk.

4.4.3.2 Installing Sample Disk Drive Part


Figure 4-13 Structure of sample disk drive part

1. Use four M5×16 socket head screws with plain/spring washer to fix the sample disk
drive part to the base plate of the analyzer.

2. Use three M3×8 socket head screws with spring washer to fix the sensor to the
base plate.

3. The distance between the bottom surface of small belt wheel and motor is 1.9mm,
which is guaranteed by fixture BA40-J27.

4. Use four M4×10 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the motor
assembly to the base plate. Use fixture BA30-K24 to adjust the tension of timing
belt within 0.19kgf-0.22kgf.

4.4.3.3 Installing Sample Bar Code Assembly (including sample


compartment)
1. Installing Sample Bar Code Assembly (including sample compartment)

4 Units and Modules 4-11


Figure 4-14 Sample bar code assembly

a. Place two sponge cushions to two sides of the glass window. Please note not to
contaminate the glass window. Stick a sponge adjusting spacer to the dust shield and
ensure the spacer is aligned to the corresponding hole on the dust shield.

b. Place the prepared glass window in the groove of the sample compartment and
secure it with the dust shield, then tighten them with four M3×8 cross pan head
screws.

c. Use two M3×8 cross pan head screws to fix the conductive brush to the sample
compartment. Connect the conductive brush cable to the base plate.

d. Use two M4×8 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the sample
compartment to the upper-front beam. Use fixture BA40-J11 to align the sample
compartment to the drive shaft and prevent the sponge spacer from shielding the light
entrance of the bar code reader.

e. Install the sample bar code assembly. Use three M5×16 socket head screws with
plain/sponge washers to fix the sample bar code assembly to the base plate. Connect
the bar code reader cable and fix it to its bracket.

f. Fix the sample disk components to the drive part, and place the bar code fixture on
position E4 of the sample disk.

g. Check the connection of all cables on the analyzer and then switch on the power
supply. The system resets mechanically. Turn on the laser beam in sample bar code
unit. Then the sample bar code reader emits light beams. Be sure not to stare into the
light beams. Otherwise your eyes may get hurt.

h. Adjust the sample bar code reader properly so that the light beam from it can pass
through the slit on the fixture. Use four M3×8 socket head screws to secure the bar
code reader to the two adjusted directions. When the sponge spacer contacts with the
bar code reader, it mustn’t block the lens of the bar code reader.

i. Install the front panel and front plate.

4-12 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-15 Sample bar code scanning adjustment

2. Replacing Sample Bar Code Reader

a. Remove the sample disk cover, and then remove the front panel.

b. Unplug the cable of the sample bar code reader and loosen the clip. Loosen the two
M3×8 socket head screws and then remove the sample bar code reader. Install a new
sample bar code reader to the bracket.

c. Adjust the sample bar code reader according to steps e, h, g and f in 1. Installing
Sample Bar Code Assembly (including sample compartment). Please note not to
shield the light entrance of bar code reader with the sponge spacer. When the sponge
spacer contacts with the bar code reader, it mustn’t block the lens of the bar code
reader.

e. Install the front panel, and then cap the sample disk.

4.5 Reagent Disk Unit

4.5.1 Introduction
1. Load reagents: Two circles with 60 positions in total are on reagent disk, of which 30
positions are available respectively on the inner and outer circles. The reagent
position supports specified size of reagent containers (reagent bottle) carrying the
reagents.

2. Refrigeration: The reagent disk unit is capable of refrigerating and keeping the
reagents at 2-8℃ in 24 hours a day, so that the reagents are always steady and will
not volatile.

3. The reagent disk rotates, driven by the drive module, carrying each reagent bottle to
the aspirate position.

4. An optional reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information


automatically.

4 Units and Modules 4-13


The following figure shows the reagent disk unit on the analyzer.

Figure 4-16 Reagent disk unit on the analyzer

4.5.2 Components and Structure


The reagent disk unit consists of reagent disk assembly, reagent refrigeration
assembly, and reagent disk drive assembly and bar code assembly. See Figure 16 to
20.

The reagent disk assembly is used to hold reagent bottles and rotates, carrying each
reagent bottle to the aspirate position for reagent aspirating. The reagent disk
assembly includes the handle, retaining screws, reagent disk bracket, reagent bottles,
bottle holder and reagent disk base.

The reagent refrigeration assembly is used to provide refrigeration function and keep
the reagents in a low-temperature environment, so that the reagents are always
steady and will not volatile. The reagent refrigeration assembly is composed of
refrigeration compartment assembly, cooling air duct assembly.

The drive assembly drives the reagent disk assembly according to predefined timing,
so that the reagents are carried to reagent aspirate position correctly. It consists of
drive axis assembly, coder sensor assembly, motor assembly, etc.

A reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information automatically. The
reagent bar code assembly is composed of the bar code reader, bracket, the anti-fog
and heat device, etc.

4-14 4 Units and Modules


4.5.3 Servicing the Reagent Disk Unit
Figure 4-17 Exploded view of reagent disk unit

To install and remove reagent disk unit:

1. Use four M5×16 socket head screws with spring/plain washer to fix the reagent
disk drive part to the base plate of the analyzer.

2. Use three M3×8 socket head screws with spring washer to fix the sensor to the
base plate.

3. Use four M4×10 socket head screws with spring washer to fix the motor to the
base plate.

4. Use two M4×8 socket head screws with spring/plain washers, and eight M4×8
screws to fix the air vent to the base plate.

5. Use four M4×8 socket head screws with spring/plain washers to fix the reagent
refrigeration compartment assembly to the base plate.

6. Align the reagent disk assembly to rotation bearing house, and tighten the retaining
screws.

7. Use four M3×10 cross countersunk head screws to fix the anti-fog and heat
assembly to the lateral side of reagent refrigeration compartment.

8. Use three M5×16 socket head screws with spring/plain washers to fix the bar code
bracket to the base plate. Use two M3×8 socket head screws with spring/plain
washers to fix the bar code reader support to the bracket. Use two M3×8 socket head
screws with spring/plain washers to fix the bar code reader to the support.

Note:

4 Units and Modules 4-15


1. For instrument without bar code reader equipped, after steps 1 to 6, use four
M3×12 cross pan head screws to fix the window cover to the lateral side of reagent
refrigeration compartment.

2. Removal steps are opposite to that of installation.

Precautions:

1. The tension of the synchronous belt should be adjusted while installing motor
assembly.

2. While installing reagent refrigeration compartment assembly, the refrigeration


compartment should be coaxial with the rotor.

3. Adjust the light beam position when install bar code reader.

4. The direction of motor cables connection should face that of the air vent outlet.

4.5.3.1 Reagent disk assembly


The reagent disk assembly includes the handle, spring screws, reagent bottles, bottle
holder, reagent disk bracket and reagent disk base. See Figure 4-18.

Installation procedure:

1. Fix two spring screws to reagent disk bracket.

2. Use two M4×12 cross pan head screws with stainless steel plain washer to fix
the two handles to the reagent disk bracket.

3. Use four M4×8 cross pan head screws to fix the reagent disk bracket to the
base.

4. Place the 30 bottle holders on the reagent disk base.

Precautions:

1. See the figure below. There should be no looseness, jamming or cracking.

2. The side of the base with chamfer should be installed upward.

3. The bottle holders should be installed under the base properly. Do not break the
retaining clip in the bottom of bottle holders.

4-16 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-18 Structure of reagent disk assembly

4.5.3.2 Reagent refrigeration assembly


The reagent refrigeration assembly is composed of refrigeration compartment and air
vent assembly, including: reagent compartment sealing ring, refrigeration
compartment, compartment mounting board, semiconductor refrigerating plate,
insulation sponges, radiator, square coil spring, radiator retaining screws, air vent, fan
and acoustic absorber, etc.

Installation procedure:

1. Put the reagent refrigeration bottom up, and remove a nut and spring washer from
the temperature sensor connector; apply some epoxy resin in the circumference of the
sensor. Do not break the temperature sensor cable.

2. Place two insulation sponges inside the reagent compartment grooves. Watch the
distance between the sponge and the bushing boss.

3. Coat the worded side of the refrigerating plate with heat glue (0.1-0.2mm thick) and
then place it in the groove of the insulation plate with glue side downwards, guide the
cable through the cable groove, then stick a heat film to the no-word side of the
refrigerating plate.

4. Place the radiators in the corresponding grooves of the reagent compartment and
close to refrigeration plate. Place square coil spring into the hole of radiator, and lead
the retaining screws of the radiator through the spring. Tighten the retaining screws in
the bottom of refrigeration compartment. Finally, apply some epoxy resin around the
radiator.

4 Units and Modules 4-17


5. Install the mounting plates and secure them with five M4×8 stainless cross pan
head screws the bottom of refrigeration compartment.

6. Use eight M4×50 cross pan head screws to fix the fan and protector hood to the air
vent.

7. Stick the acoustic absorber to the inside of air vent outlet, and keep them flat.

8. Install the wiring protector ring into the wiring hole on the vent.

9. Use four M4×8 socket head screws with spring/plain washers to fix the refrigeration
assembly to the vent.

Precautions:

1. Proper screws should be used. Stainless screws are required.

2. The refrigeration plate should be installed in correct direction; otherwise it


cannot refrigerate as expected. The worded side should be on top.

3. Tighten the two retaining screws on the radiator alternately, so as to keep


balance on the force against the refrigeration chip and not to crush the plate.

Figure 4-19 Structure of refrigeration assembly

4-18 4 Units and Modules


4.5.3.3 Reagent bar code module
The reagent bar code assembly is composed of the bar code reader, bracket, the
anti-fog and heat device, etc.

Installation procedure:

1. Use two M3×8 socket head screws with plain washer to fix the small bracket of
reader to the large support.

2. Install the reader to the small bracket and secure it with two M3×8 socket head
screws with plain/spring washers.

Precautions:

1. Be sure not to contaminate the glass window of the reader. Otherwise the
scanning performance may be compromised.

2. The screws to secure the reader should not be tightened unless you have
adjusted the reader properly.

Figure 4-20 Structure of reagent bar code module

1. Place a silica gel cushion in the groove of the anti-fog device mounting plate.

4 Units and Modules 4-19


2. Place the anti-fog glass on the rubber cushion.

3. Use four M2×8 cross pan head screws to fix the heat board to the mounting
plate with its grooved side upwards (torque: 0.5-0.6kgf.cm).

4. Place a heater in the groove of the heat board.

5. Coat little heat glue to the heater on the downward side of the
overheat-protection switch, and then use a M3×12 socket head screw to press
out the overheat-protection switch.

6. Use four M3×6 socket head screw to fix the dust shield to the mounting plate.

7. Stick a sponge spacer to the dust shield of the bar code reader.

Precautions:

1. The window on the rubber cushion should be level to that on the mounting plate.

2. The glass must not be broken or contaminated.

3. The cables of heater and overheat-protection switch should be guided properly


for convenient connection.

4. The window on the sponge spacer should be level to that on the dust shield, so
that the light beams from the bar code reader can pass through successfully.

5. When the sponge spacer contacts with the bar code reader, it mustn’t block the
lens of the bar code reader.

Figure 4-21 Structure of anti-fog and heat module

4.6 Reaction Disk Unit

4.6.1 Introduction
The reaction disk assembly holds reaction cuvettes and rotates clockwise, carrying the
cuvettes to specified positions for sample/reagent dispensing and stirring, and wash
solution dispensing. Reagents and sample react with each other in reaction cuvette.

4-20 4 Units and Modules


Also the reaction disk assembly provides a constant-temperature environment for the
reaction.

4.6.2 Components and Structure


Figure 4-22 Reaction disk assembly on the system

The reaction disk unit consists of the reaction disk assembly, drive part, reaction
compartment assembly, coder sensor assembly and motor assembly. See Figure
4-22.

4 Units and Modules 4-21


Figure 4-23 Structure of reaction disk unit

Reaction disk assembly: Used to hold reaction cuvettes, provide a


constant-temperature environment for reaction of reagent and sample in cuvettes, and
assist the photometric system to measure the absorbance change of reaction liquid.

Drive part: Used to drive the reaction disk assembly to rotate and carry reaction
cuvettes to specified positions for sample/reagent dispensing and stirring, and wash
solution dispensing. During operation, the motor drives the axis to rotate via the timing
belt.

Motor assembly: Used to provide force which drives the reaction disk assembly to
rotate via the belt and two belt wheels.

Reaction compartment assembly: Used to provide a constant-temperature


environment for reaction of reagent and sample.

Coder sensor assembly: Used to find the mechanical zero position and count the valid
edges of the coder.

4.6.3 Replacing Components and Parts

4.6.3.1 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part


1) Install the bearing fixed axis of the reaction disk drive part(without belt) to the
location hole on the base plate. See Figure 4-24. Please note that the adjusting hole

4-22 4 Units and Modules


on the fixed axis should face the back of the base plate. If not, use a cross-head
screwdriver to adjust the fixed axis via the adjusting hole.

Figure 4-24 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part 1

Figure 4-25 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part 2

2) Thread four M5×16 screws with plain/spring washer through the bottom of the
base plate to fix the drive part on it. See Figure 4-26.

4 Units and Modules 4-23


Figure 4-26 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part 3

4.6.3.2 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly


1. Install four stand bars on the base plate and tighten them with an adjustable
wrench, then sleeve the timing belt. See Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly 1

2. Install the motor with damping cushion on the mounting plate and install the small
belt wheel on the motor axis. See Figure 4-28.

4-24 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-28 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly 2

3. Use four M4×12 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the mounting
plate to the stand bars. Please note not to tighten the screws right now and not
reverse the connector of the motor. See Figure 4-29.

4 Units and Modules 4-25


Figure 4-29 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly 3

4. Install the belt on the big and small belt wheels, adjust the tension of the belt using
the fixture, and then tighten the four M4×12 socket head screws.

Figure 4-30 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly 4

4.6.3.3 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly


After installing the reaction disk drive part, use three M3×8 screws with pain/spring
washer to secure the coder sensor assembly to the base plate. Please note not to
tighten the screws right now until you have aligned the reaction disk properly via the
sensor.

4-26 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-31 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly

4.6.3.4 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly


See Figure 4-32.

1) Install three stand bars on the base plate.

2) Use three M4×20 cross pan head screws with plain washer to secure the reaction
compartment to the stand bars, and then tighten the three screws.

Precautions:

Before installing the reaction compartment, make sure you have installed the reaction
disk drive part, motor assembly and optical measurement assembly.

Figure 4-32 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly

4 Units and Modules 4-27


4.6.3.5 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly
1. Hold the drive disk by its two arc grooves, which should be aligned to the guide pin
on the rotor sleeve, then install the reaction disk assembly to the rotor sleeve.

2. Use four M5×16 socket head washer screws to fix the reaction disk assembly to
the rotor sleeve. See Figure 4-33.

3. Install the skylight cover to the drive plate with two spring screws, and make sure
the notch on the skylight cover aligns to its counterpart on the reaction disk.

4. To replace the heater, remove the lower clamp, the presser plate and the wire
pressing ring.

5. To replace the temperature sensor, remove the lower clamp, the upper clamp, the
wire pressing plate and the wire pressing ring.

6. To replace the protection switch, remove the wire pressing plate and the wire
pressing ring.

Precautions:

Do not remove the screws connecting the reaction disk to the drive disk and those
connecting the drive disk to the locating ring.

Figure 4-33 Installing the Reaction Disk Assembly

4-28 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-34 Maintaining the Reaction Disk Assembly

4.7 Photometric Unit

4.7.1 Introduction
Chemistry analyzer is a typical precision instrument which features in optics,
mechanics, electronics and logarithm. The spectrophotometer is one of the key
components of the instrument and determines directly the precision and accuracy of
measurement by the system.

 Measurement range: 0-3A


 FWHM(full wave at half maximum): 8nm±2nm
 Wavelength accuracy: ±2nm
 Stray light: ≤0.5% at 340nm
 Linearity range: 0-3.0A
 Stability: By measuring the liquid with absorbance of 0.5A for continuous 1 hour,
we conclude that the difference between the maximum and minimum
absorbance is no greater than 0.01A.
 We employ the concave flat-field gratings for optics and the photodiode array to
receive light signals.
 Reversed optics
 Applied wavelength: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm

4.7.2 Components and Structure


The BS-380/BS-390 applies the holographic concave flat-field gratings and PDA
(Photodiode Array) for photometric measurement. See the figure below. The front lens
converges the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp to the reaction cuvette
via the fiber bundle. The light beam passes through the reaction cuvette and then
converges at the entrance slit via the lens group 2. The gratings divide the light beam
from the entrance slit and then converge them to the slit array. Finally the PDA behind
the slit array converts the light signals into electric signals and then outputs them.

4 Units and Modules 4-29


Figure 4-35 Structure of photometric unit

The photometric unit is divided into two parts:

 Light source assembly


 Optical measurement assembly

4.7.2.1 Photometric unit on the system


Figure 4-36 Photometric unit on the system
Optical
measurement
assembly
Light source
assembly

4-30 4 Units and Modules


4.7.2.2 Light source assembly
Figure 4-37 Structure of light source assembly

4.7.2.3 Optical measurement assembly


The optical measurement assembly is composed of the optical assembly and AD
housing. The optical measurement assembly converges the light beam from the fiber
bundle at the reaction cuvette and then projects the light on the concave gratings via
the entrance slit. Diffracted by the gratings, the spectrum from the entrance slit images
on the PDA. The photometric measurement is realized.

4 Units and Modules 4-31


Figure 4-38 Optical measurement assembly

4.7.3 Adjustment of Photometer

4.7.3.1 Adjusting Photoelectric Waves and Collecting Position


 Connecting an oscillograph:

Photoelectric collecting position can be determined by analog signals and AD start


signals that are collected using an oscillograph. Therefore, the probe of the
oscillograph should be connected to the specified signal test point.

Open the shielding box of AD collection board (See Chapter 6), connect two probes of
the oscillograph to the AD start signal(RC and GND) and analog signal of channel
1(VG1-VG12), then connect the earth terminal to the ground. (Only the earth terminal
of one probe should be connected to the ground.)The channels, wavelength and test
points are listed in the following table.

The voltage at the 12 wavelengths before AD conversion is tested using a multimeter.


The probes of the oscillograph should be connected as follows. TP12 (AGND) is the
reference point.

Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Wavelength 340 380 412 450 505 546 570 605 660 700 740 800
Test Point VG1 VG2 VG3 VG4 VG5 VG6 VG7 VG8 VG9 VG10 VG11 VG12

4-32 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-39 AD collection board

 Setting up the oscillograph:


The two probes of the oscillograph can be any of the 4 channels and now supposed to
be channel 1 and 2, which should be configured to make the oscillograph qualified for
photoelectric test.

The peak value of a normal signal is 5V. Both channel 1 and 2 should be adjusted to
2V, so that the photoelectric wave can be observed easily. Ensure the coupling mode
of the two channels is DC. Set up proper sampling interval to get waves easily. Set the
sampling mode to AUTO. See the figure below:

Figure 4-40 Photoelectric wave 1

Time 500ms (500ms


or 1s for each scale
on X-coordinate)
DC Roll mode

2V for this channel,


2V for each scale on
Y-coordinate

Sampling interval
100KS/s
4 Units and Modules 4-33
4.7.3.2 Adjusting Lamp Brightness and Photoelectric Collecting
Position
1. Enter the Reaction Disk Unit screen of the BS-380/BS-390 test and maintenance
software, select Reset Reaction Disk, and then turn on the lamp. See the figure below.

2. Use the multimeter to check if the voltage at the light source assembly terminal is
within 11.8-12.0V (lamp brightness is approximately within 233-237). If not, select the
Parameter tab and then select Reaction Disk Unit in the Unit field, adjust the lamp
brightness until satisfied. (The greater the parameter, the higher the voltage) After
adjusting the parameters, turn off the lamp and then turn it on so that you can get
adjusted voltage.

Figure 4-41 Adjusting Light Source Brightness

3. Add 180μl water to cuvettes No.55-60 to ensure flat waves.

4. First test the waves at 340nm, set up the Circles to 1 and (cuvette) Position to 1, and
then select the Rotate and Measure button.

Figure 4-42 Reaction disk rotates and measures

4-34 4 Units and Modules


5. When the oscillograph displays the complete waves circularly as shown in Figure
4-43, press STOP on the oscillograph. The waves are frozen and stop going.

6. Find the waves for the five cuvettes in which water is dispensed. (In order to find the
waves easily, water should be dispensed to cuvettes No.24-28). Generally, the five
waves of the cuvettes with water are higher and flatter than those of other cuvettes.

If the waves are flat, the upper waves refer to AD start signals (In a bundle of collected
signals, the rightmost means 340nm and the leftmost means 800nm), and the waves
underneath refer to the photoelectric analog signals.

Figure 4-43 Photoelectric wave 2

Check if the AD start signal at 340nm is in the middle of the photoelectric analog signal
(See the figure below). If yes, the photoelectric collecting position is correct.

4 Units and Modules 4-35


Figure 4-44 Photoelectric wave 3

If the AD start signal at 340nm is in the decreasing part of the photoelectric analog
signal instead of its middle (See the figure below), the photoelectric collecting position
is not correct and must be adjusted by moving the coder sensor of the reaction disk left
or right.

After the 340nm channel is adjusted, connect the probe 2 to VG12 of channel 12,
check the waves and collecting position of 800nm in the same way as 340nm. Make
sure that all AD start signals are in the flat part of the photoelectric analog signals.

Check if the waves of all channels are flat according to the step mentioned above. If
not, the pre-amplification board may go wrong and the optical assembly should be
replaced.

4-36 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-45 Abnormal waves

4.7.3.3 Adjusting Signal Gain of Photoelectric Unit


The purpose of adjusting signal gain is to adjust the water blank to a proper value
when the light is too strong.

Precautions for signal gain adjustment:

1. The lower limit of the light intensity alarm is calculated by the gain parameter of
340nm. The lower limit value is increased based on the gain increasement, which
causing the “Weak light” alarm cannot be released effectively by adjusting the gain.
(The calculated threshold value can be queried through Maintenance  System
Maintenance  Light Source Setup.)

2. The signal gain of the photoelectric unit has been configured properly before the
analyzer leaves the factory. When an alarm occurs indicating weak light, replace the
lamp instead of adjusting the signal gain. After replacing the lamp, check the new lamp
by executing Cuvette/Lamp Check on the Daily Maint. page of the operating
software.

NOTE:
Before testing the photoelectric gain, make sure that the lamp has been
on for at least 5 minutes; otherwise the lamp is not steady.

Select the Photoelectric Unit tab of the Test and Maintenance Software. Check if the
AD values for water blank of cuvettes No.24-28 are greater than 63000. See following
figure:

4 Units and Modules 4-37


Figure 4-46 Water blank AD value

If the AD value exceeds the range, select the Parameter tab and then select Main Unit
in the Unit field, select Inquire to view the gain parameters of each channel (When the
gain parameter increases, the corresponding AD value will decrease), adjust the water
blank AD value of each channel within 47000-49000.

4.7.4 Replacing Optical Assembly


If the optical assembly can no longer work as promised, perform the following steps
to replace it:

1. Remove the upper and front panels of the analyzer.

2. Remove the reaction disk.

3. Remove the upper plate of the AD housing; unplug the pre-amplification-AD


collection cable from the AD collection board, and unplug the parallel port
connector from the bottom of the AD housing assembly; remove the AD housing
assembly.

4. Remove the rear cover of the light source assembly; use a hex wrench to
loosen the M3 retaining screw that fixes the fiber bundle on the front plate of
lamp assembly; then unplug the fiber bundle (Figure 4-37).

5. Loosen the three screws that fix the heat chamber; raise the heat chamber with
one hand and lift up the optical assembly with the other hand so that the front
lens assembly is disconnected from the heat chamber.

6. Install the new optical assembly following the above steps reversely.

Precautions:

1. Cap the fiber bundle terminal that is removed.

2. After removing the old optical assembly, place it in the installation package together
with the fiber bundle, and then bring the package back or send it to our company for
servicing.

4.7.5 Replacing PDA assembly


If the PDA assembly can no longer work as promised, perform the following steps to
replace it:

4-38 4 Units and Modules


NOTE:
After the PDA assembly is replaced, use new light source assembly to
adjust the gain of the channels; otherwise the alarm like “the light is too
strong “ is given after the new lamp is installed.
Keep the washers on the posts of the optical assembly properly and
each post has same two types of washers.
Insert the signal cable correctly.
Use inner hexagon wrench to tighten the PDA assembly in place to
ensure the two surfaces contact closely.

1. Make sure the power is turned off.

2. Remove the wash station.

3. Remove the cover of the reaction carousel and the panel around the it. Rotate the
sample and reagent probe above the sample and reagent carousel; rotate the mixer
to the wash well position for the convenience of removing the reaction carousel and
heat chamber.

4. After removing the reaction carousel, loosen the drain line of the reaction carousel
heat chamber and remove the heat chamber.

5. Remove AD housing and open its upper cover; unplug the pre-amplification-AD
collection cable from the AD collection board, and unplug the power cable.

AD box
assembly

Adjusting
washer

6. Loosen the screw used to fix the fiber bundle of the Light Source Assembly and
remove the optical fiber bundle.

7. Loosen the three M5 hexagon screws used to fix the optical measurement
assembly and remove it with the optical fiber bundle.
Note:
1) Avoid bending the fiber bundle with radius less than 60mm.The fiber bundle is
fixed with the strap on the post of the heat chamber. When removing it, slide the
bubble with the strap upward from the post. You can also cut the strap because there
is spare strap in the accessories kit.
2) Protect the head of the bubble from scratching and contamination.

4 Units and Modules 4-39


3) There are washers on each post used to adjust the height of the optical axis. Keep
them properly and do not drop them.

8. Loosen the two M3 screws on the upper shielding cover of the PDA assembly and
remove the cover.
Screw used to fix the
shielding
cover

PDA
assembly

9. Unplug the signal cable and power cable of pre-amplification board and remove the 4
M3 hexagon screws highlighted in the following figure

Screw used to fix PDA


assembly

.
Note: keep the four screws which are daubed with the sealing glue and when
installing new PDA assembly, use the original screws.

10. Remove the PDA assembly. The PDA on positioning pin may be very tight. You can swing
the PDA assembly to remove it with the sealing pad.
PDA
positioning
pin

PDA
sealing pad

11. Install new PDA assembly in the reverse order of step 8-10 and note:
1) The signal cable should be inserted correctly as J2 to J2 and J3 to J3.
2) Check if the sealing pad is in place when the new PDA assembly is installed.

4-40 4 Units and Modules


3) Tighten the PDA assembly in place until the inner hexagon wrench cannot screw.
Ensure the surface showed in purple and the one in green are contact closely.
Because the sealing pad is flexible, the four screws should be tightened alternately in
two or three cycles.
4)Note: use the original screws when installing the new PDA assembly.

Ensure the two sides


contact closely

12. Install the optical measurement assembly in the reverse order of step 2-7 and note:
1) The number(thickness) of the post should remain unchanged.
2) The signal cable should be inserted correctly as J2 to J2 and J3 to J3.
3)Avoid bending the fiber bundle with radius less than 60mm. The bundle should be
fixed with the strap on the post of the heat chamber just as before.

13. After replacement, switch on the power of the analyzer and the analyzing unit, and
run the Test and Maintenance Software. When the lamp becomes steady, readjust
the gain parameters of the channels according to 3.2.2.

14. Verify the performance stability of the instrument: run the operation software and
request the test with water as the sample or reagent. The reaction curve should be
straight and flat.

15. After the PDA assembly is replaced, all clinical tests must be re-calibrated

4.8 Wash Unit


Wash unit consists of auto wash assembly, preheat assembly and wash syringe
assembly. It is installed on the right side of analyzing unit. See Figure 4-47.

4 Units and Modules 4-41


Figure 4-47 Wash unit

Wash assembly consists of wash probe assembly and drive assembly. Wash probe
assembly is connected to drive assembly via knurled screws. See Figure 4-48.

Figure 4-48 Wash unit assembly

4-42 4 Units and Modules


Figure 4-49 Wash probe syringe assembly

5ml syringe
assembly

5ml syringe slide

Linear motor

Dust shield

4.8.1 Install and Service the Wash Assembly


Loosen the knurled screws when installing and maintaining the 8-phase wash probe
assembly.

Precautions:

Do not remove other screws except for knurled screws!

4.8.2 Install and Service the Wash Probe Syringe Assembly


Use four 4X12 socket head screws with spring washer to install the syringe assembly
in corresponding position as shown in Figure 4-47. And then install the protection
shield.

While maintaining, remove the protection shield first. Then remove the four screws,
and the syringe assembly. Replace problem parts.

4.8.3 Install and Service the Wash Preheat Assembly


Use two 4X12 socket head screws with spring washer to install the assembly in
corresponding position as shown in Figure 4-47. While maintaining, remove and
replace problem parts.

4.9 ISE Unit (optional)


The ISE module is optional for fully-automated chemistry analyzers and designed to
measure the concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
The volume of the serum or plasma sample is 70µl and that of the diluted urine

4 Units and Modules 4-43


sample is 140µl. The dilution ratio of the urine sample is 1:10 (1 part of urine sample
and 9 parts of urine diluent).

4.9.1 Components and Structure


The ISE unit consists of the ISE module, pump module and reagent module. See
Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Components of ISE module


Name Description
ISE module The ISE module includes four electrodes (K+, Na+, Cl- and
Reference). Samples are dispensed via the sample entry port on
top of the ISE module and then analyzed and measured.

Pump The pump module includes three peristaltic pumps, which are used
module to transfer reagents and waste liquid.

Reagent The reagent module includes calibrant A, calibrant B, waste tank


module and a chip that indicates reagent inventory. This module provides
reagents for sample analysis and stores the waste liquid.

4.9.2 Install and Remove ISE unit


As shown in Figure 4-50, ISE unit consists of three parts: ISE module, pump module
and reagent module. They are installed onto the base with M4×10 socket head screws
and M4×12 cross pan head screw with washer.

Figure 4-50 ISE unit components and installation

4-44 4 Units and Modules


4.9.2.1 ISE module
Figure 4-51 Remove and install ISE module

As shown in Figure 4-51, ISE module installation and remove are as follows:

Remove:

1. Remove the panel above ISE module and the right side plate of the main unit.

2. Unplug the drainage tubing and wiring on ISE module.

3. Loosen the screws on the shield, and remove the shield.

4. Remove the four M3X8 cross pan head screws, and remove the ISE module.

Install:

1. Install the ISE module to the shield with four M3X8 cross pan head screws.

2. Install the shield and tighten the screws.

3. Lead the drainage tubing through the hole on shield, and connect wiring (Note:
The tubing and wiring are not indicated in the figure).

4. Install the panel and the right side plate.

4 Units and Modules 4-45


4.9.2.2 Pump Module
Figure 4-52 Install and remove pump module

Remove:

1. Open the panel above ISE module and the right side plate of the main unit.

2. Remove the fluidic tubing of pump module and motor cable (Note: Tubing and
cable are not indicated in the figure).

3. Three peristaltic pumps are installed to pump support with four M2.5X6 cross pan
head screws with Φ2.5 plain washer. Remove the pumps as needed.

4. The pump support is fixed on the base with four M4X10 socket head screws.
Remove it if necessary.

Install:

1. Use four M4X10 socket head screws to install the pump support to the base.

2. Use four M2.5X6 cross pan head screws with Φ2.5 plain washer to install the
peristaltic pump to the support.

3. Connect fluidic tubing and motor cable.

4. Install the panel and the right side plate.

4-46 4 Units and Modules


4.9.2.3 Reagent Module
Figure 4-53 Install and remove reagent module

Remove:

1. Open the front door of the main unit.

2. Hold the pack and pull it out horizontally.

3. Press down the button on the connector and remove it.

Install:

1. Remove the red cap on reagent pack.

2. Connect the fluidic tubing on reagent pack.

3. Push the reagent pack horizontally into ISE reagent compartment. Do not bend
the tubing.

4.9.2.4 ISE electrodes


To install the electrodes, follow the steps below:

1. Open the reference electrode from its protective packaging and remove the yellow
insert. Place the reference electrode inside the housing by pressing down the
compression plate and push it straight against the back of the housing. (Note: Do
not throw away the yellow inset. It should be installed back when storing the
reference electrode.) Soak the electrode in warm water until the lumen of the
electrode has been cleared free of salt build-up if necessary.

4 Units and Modules 4-47


2 Place other electrodes inside ISE module. Cl-, K+ and Na+ electrodes can be
placed in easily. For Spacer installed on the top, you may need to press down the
compression plate and push in the electrode.

3 Check if 5 electrodes have been installed properly. Ensure that the electrodes are
level with each other vertically as well as in the front.

Steps to remove the electrodes are the opposite to that of installation. Purge the
fluidics before removing the electrodes. If the electrodes are not use for a long time
after removal, store them properly. Refer 7.8.4 ISE Unit Storage (Optional) to for
more information.

4-48 4 Units and Modules


CAUTION:

After installing the electrodes, the ISE unit (optional) should be on


power all the time. In some cases that the POWER will be shut down
for a long time more than half an hour, refer to 7.8.4 ISE Unit Storage
to store the electrodes properly.

4.9.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes


If the sample contains insoluble substances like fibrin or other substances, they can
be accumulated in the waste tube after long time use, causing clogging of the waste
tube.

Name Code Quantity Remarks


Unclogging tool 115-023372-00 1 Use BA4A
for ISE maintenance
kit.

Maintenance tools

Warning:

Do not spill liquid on the analyzer. Liquid ingression may cause


equipment damage.

Biohazard:
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the
maintenance process.

Note:
Excessive bleach and DI water flushed into the ISE reagent pack waste
bag may cause waste bag over expansion and clog the Cal A & Cal B
reagent flow.
To prevent this problem, connect to an old used-up reagent pack or use
the connector of the used-up reagent.

1. Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right
side analyzer panel.

2 Remove the electrode housing cover. Remove the waste tube fitting from the
bottom of the right angle adaptor. Remove waste peri-pump tube from the pump
bracket. Refer to pictures below.

4 Units and Modules 4-49


3 Connect the waste tube fitting to a syringe and unclogging tool with 5 mL of
undiluted household bleach. Refer to pictures below

4 Press the wand release button to remove the wand from the current in use ISE
reagent pack and keep it in a save place. Engage the wand to an old used-up
reagent pack.

5 Inject bleach into the ISE waste tube and soak the tube for 5 minutes. Discharge the
waste into the reagent pack.

Note: When the bleach cannot be injected into the ISE pack, remove the wand and
push down to open the waste valve manually with a sharp object, and then inject
again. If bleach can go through this time, the waste bag was clogged and cannot be
used. If bleach still cannot be injected, replacing the ISE wand is recommended top,
you may need to press down the compression plate and push in the electrode.

6 Repeat this step with 5 mL of DI water without the 5 minutes of soaking time.

7 Remove the wand from the old use-up pack and re-install it back to the current in
use ISE pack. Re-install the waste tube fitting back to the ISE electrode housing
right angle adaptor and waste peri-pump tube back to the pump bracket. Re-install
the housing cover.

Alignment and confirmation

Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully
unclogged.

4-50 4 Units and Modules


5 Hydropneumatic System

5.1 Introduction
1. The fluidic system of BS-380/BS-390 includes the sampling system and washing
system.

2. The sampling system is equipped with two probes, two mixers and two syringes. The
sample syringe is 100μl and the reagent syringe is 500μl.

3. The inside and outside of the two probes and two mixers are washed via liquid pump.
There are four wash wells collecting waste from washing the inside and outside of
the probes and mixers.

4. The reaction cuvettes are washed in 8 phases: 1) Phase 1-2: Cuvette is washed with
wash solution; 2) Phase 3-6: Cuvette is washed with deionized water; 3) Phase 7-8:
No liquid is added.

5. The wash solution and deionized water for cuvette wash are added via syringe. The
deionized water and diluted wash solution is preheated to 30~37℃.

6. The waste from washing is drained via liquid pump: 1) Phase 1-3: high concentration
waste; 2) Phase 4-8: low concentration waster; 3) Phase 7-8: the wipe blocks can
fully absorb the residual liquid in cuvette.

7. Water is supplied by water treatment system, with water pressure and flow specified.

8. Waste collecting tube assembly is used to collect the waste and it should be installed
with proper height to facilitate free discharge of the waste liquid. Floater is set for the
assembly. When the waste is not discharged smoothly, the system will give out an
alarm to avoid overflow.

9. There are level sensor connector and external high concentration waste bucket
equipped for high concentration waste.

5 Hydropneumatic System 5-1


5.2 Function Block Diagram
The fluidic system of BS-380/BS-390 includes the sampling system and cuvette
washing system, as shown in the figure.

The cuvette washing system consists of dispensing module and drainage module.
The dispensing module is driven by syringe to dispense wash solution into cuvettes;
the drainage module is driven by liquid pump to draw waste from cuvettes. The
washing system relies on the repeated actions of dispensing and draining to realize
the repeated using of cuvettes.

The sampling system consists of dispensing in fixed volume and probes/mixers


washing. The fixed dispensing volume is controlled by the syringe, so that fixed
volume of sample and reagent can be dispensed; probes/mixers washing is driven by
liquid pump to wash the inside and outside of the probes/mixers, so as to decrease
carryover.

In the meantime, the fluidic system of BS-380/BS-390 includes 5 external interfaces:


3 outlets respectively for draining high/low concentration wash waste and gravity
waste from wash wells, and 2 inlets respectively for providing diluted wash solution
and deionized water.

Figure 5-1 Fluidic system of BS-380/BS-390


BS-380 hydro system

1. Sampling system

2. Cuvette wash system

Sample Reagent
2.2 syringe syringe
Dispensing 2.1 Aspiration
module module

Preheat block
Sample Reagent
Reaction probe probe
Phase 1, 2 Phase 1 Phase 2/ Phase 4/ Phase 6/ Phase 8
Phase 3~6
wash waste 3 waste 5 waste 7 waste waste disk reagent
DI water
solution pump pump pump pump pump compartment Sample Reagent
waste mixer mixer

Driven by Driven by External high-


syringe syringe conc waste sewer
bucket
External module Driven
External by pump
wash water
filter solution treatment
bucket system

filter

Inlet valve

Water tank

5-2 5 Hydropneumatic System


5.3 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System
Refer to Appendix A.

5.4 Layout of Fluidic System


Figure 5-2 Layout of fluidic system installation

5 Hydropneumatic System 5-3


5.5 Layout of Fluidic System
Figure 5-3 Auto washing tubing connection

Table 5-1 Corresponding relationship between wiring board and wash unit
Wiring board
No. Wash unit Indication
No.
1 13 Phase1 dispense probe D1
2 14 Phase2 dispense probe D2
3 15 Phase3 dispense probe D3
4 16 Phase4 dispense probe D4
5 1 Phase5 dispense probe D5
6 2 Phase6 dispense probe D6
7 3 Phase7 dispense probe D7
8 4 Phase8 dispense probe D8
9 12 Phase1 drain probe W1
10 11 Phase2 drain probe W2
11 10 Phase3 drain probe W3
12 9 Phase4 drain probe W4
13 8 Phase5 drain probe W5
14 7 Phase6 drain probe W6
15 6 Phase7 drain probe W7
16 5 Phase8 drain probe W8

Table 5-2 Auto wash tubing


Length
Length Total
above
No. Wash unit below panel length Mark
panel
(mm) (mm)
(mm)
1 Phase1 dispense probe 150 440 590 13
2 Phase2 dispense probe 145 450 595 14
3 Phase3 dispense probe 140 270 410 15
4 Phase4 dispense probe 130 280 410 16

5-4 5 Hydropneumatic System


Length
Length Total
above
No. Wash unit below panel length Mark
panel
(mm) (mm)
(mm)
5 Phase5 dispense probe 125 510 635 1
6 Phase6 dispense probe 125 495 620 2
7 Phase7 dispense probe 125 475 600 3
8 Phase8 dispense probe 130 470 600 4
9 Phase1 drain probe 185 405 590 12
10 Phase2 drain probe 180 395 575 11
11 Phase3 drain probe 180 420 600 10
12 Phase4 drain probe 180 470 650 9
13 Phase5 drain probe 180 450 630 8
14 Phase6 drain probe 180 435 615 7
15 Phase7 drain probe 175 425 600 6
16 Phase8 drain probe 175 420 595 5

5.6 Connectors and Tubing


Table 5-3 Fluidic tubing types

No. Product Number

1# M6G-020026---
2# M6G-020030---
3# 082-000314-00
4# 3001-10-07069
5# M6G-020028---
6# 0040-10-32301
7# M6G-020049---
9# M6G-020022---

Table 5-4 Hydro tubing list


No.s of
No. Code Type Length tubing Inlet Outlet
sign
1 J1 1 680 2 T701 T101
2 J2 1 930 2 T102 T103
3 J3 1 710 2 T104 T105
4 J4 3 900 2 T112 P3
5 J5 1 840 2 T107 T108
6 J6 3 100 1 T111 P1
7 J7 1 110 1 T110 P2
8 J8 1 30 0 T105 F4
9 J9 3 410 2 T109 T406
10 J10 1 30 0 T112 F3
11 D2 3 500 2 P2 T501

5 Hydropneumatic System 5-5


No.s of
No. Code Type Length tubing Inlet Outlet
sign
12 D3 1 590 2 T501 RM-OUTWASH
13 D4 1 680 2 T501 SM-OUTWASH
14 D6 3 650 2 P1 SV6
15 D7 1 50 1 SV6 CV4
16 D8 1 750 2 CV4 R-OUTWASH
17 D9 1 50 1 SV6 CV3
18 D10 1 540 2 CV3 S-OUTWASH
19 D11 1 50 1 CV2 RM-OUTWASH
20 D12 1 50 1 CV1 SM-OUTWASH
21 01 3 600 2 P3 T601
22 02 3 230 1 T601 T602
23 03 3 85 0 T603 T604
24 04 6 1070 0 T605 T606
25 05 3 630 1 T601 T607
26 06 7 85 0 T608 T609
27 07 7 1100 0 T610 T611
28 G1 1 1300 2 T703 T401
29 G2 3 220 1 T402 SV1
30 G3 3 35 0 SV1 T403
31 G4 3 35 0 SV1 T416
32 G6 3 110 1 T407 T408
33 G7 3 190 1 T408 SV3
34 G8 3 35 0 SV3 T409
35 G9 3 35 0 SV3 T417
36 G10 3 135 1 T408 SV2
37 G11 3 35 0 SV2 T412
38 G12 3 35 0 SV2 T415
39 G13 4 90 0 T403 T404
40 G14 4 90 0 T409 T410
41 G15 4 90 0 T412 T413
42 G16 4 30 0 T417 T411
43 G17 4 30 0 T415 T414
44 G18 4 30 0 T416 T405
45 1 4 590 2 T411 CUVETTE5
46 2 4 595 2 T411 CUVETTE6
47 3 4 410 0

5-6 5 Hydropneumatic System


No.s of
No. Code Type Length tubing Inlet Outlet
sign
48 4 4 410 0
49 5 4 635 2 CUVETTE8 T204
50 6 4 620 2 CUVETTE7 T201
51 7 4 600 2 CUVETTE6 T201
52 8 4 600 2 CUVETTE5 T202
53 9 4 590 2 CUVETTE4 T202
54 10 4 575 2 CUVETTE3 T203
55 11 4 600 2 CUVETTE2 T203
56 12 4 650 2 CUVETTE1 T205
57 13 4 630 2 T405 CUVETTE1
58 14 4 615 2 T405 CUVETTE2
59 15 4 600 2 T414 CUVETTE3
60 16 4 595 2 T414 CUVETTE4
61 C1 3 480 2 T205 P4
62 C2 4 70 1 T203 T208
63 C3 4 70 1 T202 T207
64 C4 4 70 1 T201 T206
65 C5 3 470 2 T204 P8
66 C6 3 430 2 T208 P5
67 C7 3 400 2 T207 P6
68 C8 3 350 2 T206 P7
69 C9 3 180 1 P4 T304
70 C10 3 180 1 P4 T304
71 C11 3 220 1 P6 T303
72 C12 3 220 1 P7 T302
73 C13 3 110 1 P8 T301
74 W1 1 650 2 T306 T705
75 W2 1 850 2 T304 T706
76 W3 5 185 0 T314 T704
77 W4 5 505 0 S-OUTWASH T308
78 W5 5 410 0 R-OUTWASH T309
79 W6 5 480 0 RM-OUTWASH T310
80 W7 5 525 0 SM-OUTWASH T311
81 W8 5 260 0 Reagent disk T316
82 W9 5 690 0 T316 T312
83 W10 5 100 0 Reaction disk T315

5 Hydropneumatic System 5-7


No.s of
No. Code Type Length tubing Inlet Outlet
sign
84 W11 5 325 0 T315 T313
Water
85 G701 1 10000 0 treatment T701
system
Wash solution
86 G702 3 300 0 T702
tank
87 G703 1 2000 0 T702 T703
88 G704 8 5000 0 T704 Sewer
89 G705 5 5000 0 T705 Sewer
High
90 G706 8 2000 0 T706 concentration
waste bucket

Table 5-5 Hydro connectors list


No. Code Product No.
1 T101 M6Q-030037---
2 T102 M6Q-030037---
3 T103 082-000147-00
4 T104 082-000147-00
5 T105 M6Q-030037---
6 T106 M6Q-030045---
7 T107 M6Q-030045---
8 T108 M6Q-030033---
9 T109 BA40-20-72949
10 T110 M6Q-030037---
11 T111 BA40-20-72949
12 T112 M6Q-030037---
13 T113 M6Q-030037---
14 T201 M6Q-030105---
15 T202 M6Q-030105---
16 T203 M6Q-030105---
17 T204 M6Q-030042---
18 T205 M6Q-030042---
19 T206 M6Q-030042---
20 T207 M6Q-030042---
21 T208 M6Q-030042---
22 T301 BA40-20-72949
23 T302 BA40-20-72949

5-8 5 Hydropneumatic System


No. Code Product No.
24 T303 BA40-20-72949
25 T304 M6Q-030043---
26 T306 BA40-20-72949
27 T308 BA40-20-72948
28 T309 BA40-20-72948
29 T310 BA40-20-72948
30 T311 BA40-20-72948
31 T312 BA40-20-72948
32 T313 BA40-20-72948
33 T314 BA40-20-61914
34 T315 M6Q-030096---
35 T316 M6Q-030067---
36 T401 BA40-20-72949
37 T402 BA40-20-72949
38 T403 M6Q-030042---
39 T404 M6Q-030106---
40 T405 M6Q-030105---
41 T406 BA40-20-72949
42 T407 BA40-20-72949
43 T408 M6Q-030043---
44 T409 M6Q-030042---
45 T410 M6Q-030106---
46 T411 M6Q-030105---
47 T412 M6Q-030042---
48 T413 M6Q-030106---
49 T414 M6Q-030105---
50 T415 M6Q-030042---
51 T416 M6Q-030042---
52 T417 M6Q-030042---
53 T501 M6Q-030043---
54 T601 M6Q-030043---
55 T602 BA40-20-72949
56 M6Q-030065---
T603
57 M6Q-120021---
58 M6Q-030065---
T604
59 M6Q-120021---
60 T605 0040-10-32304

5 Hydropneumatic System 5-9


No. Code Product No.
61 0040-10-32305
62 0040-10-32306
63 T606 BA30-20-06758
64 0040-10-32307
65 T607 BA40-20-72949
66 M6Q-030065---
T608
67 M6Q-120021---
68 M6Q-030065---
T609
69 M6Q-120021---
70 M6Q-030065---
T610
71 M6Q-120021---
72 ba40-20-72958
73 T611 BA40-20-61909
74 0040-10-32303
M6Q-030052---
75 T701

76 M90-100009---
77 M90-100014---
78 T702 M90-100021---
79 M90-100025---
80 M90-100050---
81
T703
82
83 T704
M6Q-030052---
84 T705

85
T706
86
87 M90-100009---
88 M90-100014---
89 T707 M90-100021---
90 M90-100025---
91 M90-100050---

5-10 5 Hydropneumatic System


6 Hardware

6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the function of circuit boards in the BS-380/BS-390.

6.2 Safety Precautions


Do not touch the circuit boards by hand or others, when the analyzer is running.

If you need to detach the circuit boards, you must first switch off the Main Power of
the analyzer. Please wear gloves to protect the circuit boards from ESD (electrostatic
discharge) or release the charge first before detaching the circuit boards.

6.3 Circuit boards


The following table lists the number and the function description of the circuit boards.

Table 6-1 Hardware circuit boards


PCBA(PCB) Function Number
Reagent refrigeration This unit is used to cool the reagents, #1
board indicate the temperature and drive the fan
and defog circuit.
051-000052-00
(050-000042-00)
Main board As the main control part of BS-380/BS-390, #2
the main board communicates with PC
051-001799-00
through serial port RS232 and transmits
(050-001553-00)
data and commands; also it transmits data
and commands to other sub-units (ISE, etc.)
through extended serial ports. This unit can
control the AD conversion board to adjust

6 Hardware 6-1
PCBA(PCB) Function Number
the numerical control resistor, collect and
receive photoelectric data.
The main board provides a BDM
(Background Debug Model) interface for
debugging software, and a serial port to
update its application software.
Three-disk driver board This unit can control and drive the three #3
disks, temperature control unit and other
050-001553-00
(050-001555-00) related moving parts.

Power board This unit provides the power for the whole #4
machine.
12V board:
051-000509-00
(050-000386-01)
24V board:
051-000510-00
(050-000387-01)
Connection board:
051-000511-00
(050-000388-01)
Three-probe driver This unit can control and drive the reagent #5
board probe, the sample probe, the mixers, wash
unit and related parts to move.
051-001990-00
(050-001715-00)
AD conversion board This unit can modify the analog signals from #6
the pre-amplification board and convert the
BA40-30-61365
analog signals into digital signals. Also this
(BA40-20-61364A) board provides a SPI (Serial Port Interface)
for connecting to the main board.
Pre-amplification board This unit can converse the light signals into #7
electrical analog signals by the photoelectric
BA40-30-61363
diode.
(BA40-20-61362A)
Level detection board This unit can test the sample’s level and #8
detects obstructions occurring to the sample
051-000142-00
(050-000283-01) probe.

400ul reagent probe This unit can test the reagent’s level and #13
level detection board detects obstructions occurring to the
reagent probe.
051-000361-00
(050-000283-01)
Wash solution preheat This unit can process and collect signals #9
temperature control from two DI water temperature sensors and
board one environment temperature sensor. It can
also realize the AD conversion of these
BA38-20-88228
signals. It provides a SPI (Serial Port
(BA38-20-88227A) Interface) for connecting to three DI water
heater power supply and three-disk driver
board.

6-2 6 Hardware
PCBA(PCB) Function Number
Pump and valve driver This unit receives signal from the #10
board three-probe driver board and then makes
the pumps and valves act.
BA40-30-61373
(BA40-20-61372A)
Reaction disk This board collects the temperature sensor #11
temperature control signals from the reaction disk and converts
board them into digital signals. This board
provides a SPI (Serial Port Interface) and a
BA38-20-87909
power supply interface for connecting to the
(BA38-20-87910A) three-disk driver board via a slip ring.
Reaction disk heater It connects to heater power supply, provides #12
connection board interface for heater temperature protection
switch, and connects heater and
BA38-30-87925
temperature switch.
(BA38-20-87926A)
Simulate power The main function of the simulate power #14
connection board connection board is to provide separate
simulate power to the photometer system
BA38-30-88342
and connect the 5V power of the main
050-000570-00) board and the photometer.

6.4 Layout of the boards


Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 show the circuit boards on the analyzer.

Figure 6-1 Layout of the circuit boards-1

13# 8#
7#

6#

1#

2#

3#

4#

14#

5#

6 Hardware 6-3
Figure 6-2 Layout of the circuit boards-2
11#
12#

9#

10#

6.5 Detaching and Assembling Circuit Boards


You must pull out all plugs (refer to 6.8 Connection Diagram) first when you detach
the boards and then you get out the fixing screws on the boards.

6.6 Function of board


6.6.1 Control Framework
The BS-380/BS-390 consists of the following three units: the analyzing unit (main
unit), operation unit (PC) and output unit (printer).

The analyzing unit (main unit) consists of the following units: the temperature control
system, the reaction system (include ISE), the photoelectric test system, the sample
and reagent delivery system, the mixing system and the auto clean unit etc.

Figure 6-3 shows the control framework of the BS-380/BS-390.

 Communicating with the PC through the RS232 to send commands, reply data
and test results.
 Controlling the data acquired process of optical system.
 Controlling the moving units’ action and collecting the status signal.
 Controlling the temperature adjustment system and collecting temperature status
signal.

6-4 6 Hardware
Figure 6-3 Control framework of BS-380/BS-390

6.6.2 Main Board


Functions of the main board:

 transmitting the data and commands with PC through RS232;


 communicating with the sub-units(include ISE), transmitting the data and
commands through the extended RS232;
 adjusting the numeric adjustable resistor on the AD conversion board and
collecting the photoelectric data;
 providing a BDM interface to debug software and update application software.
Figure 6-4 shows the function framework of the main control board.

6 Hardware 6-5
Figure 6-4 Function of the main control board

6.6.3 Three-disk Driver Board


This circuit board can receive the commands from the main board, and decode the
orders to drive the moving parts of the three disks; it also controls the heater
according the signal from the temperature senses. Main function

 All CPU on this board receive the orders from the main board through the RS232,
and decode it to act.
 The CPU on board output signals to control the moving parts related with the
three disks.
 This unit can receive the signals from the moving parts’ sensors, and other status
signals.
 This unit can control the heater of the reaction disk (solid heater directly), the
pre-warm wash water and it can test the temperature of this two parts and the
environment temperature too.
Figure 6-5 shows the function framework of the three-disk driver board.

6-6 6 Hardware
Figure 6-5 Three-disk-drive boar

6.6.4 Three-probe Driver Board


This unit can control the stepper motors, the DC motors and the valves related with
the probes and the mixers and response according with the signals from the senses.

 This unit can receive the orders from the main board through the RS232 and
transmit the test data to the main board.
 This unit can control and drive the moving parts of reagent probe, sample probe,
mixers, wash unit, pumps, valves, syringes, etc.
 This unit can receive the position signals from the moving parts’ sensors, and the
signal for protecting probes from collision in horizontal orientation.
 This unit can test the signal for protecting wash unit from collision in vertical
orientation.
 This unit can test the liquid level according the signal from the level detection
board and receive the signals for protecting the probes from collision too.
Figure 6-6 shows the function framework of the three-probe driver board.

6 Hardware 6-7
Figure 6-6 Three-probe driver board

6.6.5 Pre-amp Board


The Pre-amp circuit board can converse the light signals into electrical analog signals
by the photoelectric diode array. There are 12 elements on the photoelectric diode
array who can converse the light signal into the current signal in difference
wavelengths and the Pre-amplifier turns the current signal to the voltage signal and
transmit this signal to the AD conversion board.

6.6.6 AD Conversion Board


This unit can modify the analog signals from the pre-amp board and convert the
analog signals into digital signals. The 12 elements on the photoelectric diode array
converse the monochromatic light signal into the voltage signal in the difference
wavelengths and the AD conversion board filters the signal and amplifies it
anti-polarity, then this signal arrives the AD input after it passes the selectable switch;
then the AD samples the 12 signals in turn controlled by the signal from the main
control board and the AD result value are sent to the main control board to deal with
further. The AD conversion board also provides power to the Pre-amp board.

Figure 6-7 shows the function framework of the AD conversion board.

Figure 6-7 AD conversion board

6-8 6 Hardware
6.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board
This board is independent compared with other circuit boards; the unit can control the
cooler chip on or off and then make the reagents cool; it can adjust the temperature in
the reagent carousel ; this unit can also drive the fan of the whole system and reflect
the fan’s signal to the three disks control-driver board; the detail is:

 controlling the refrigeration

 controlling the indicating LED of the refrigeration

 controlling the fans and defogging the code scan’s windows

Figure 6-8 shows the function framework of the reagent refrigeration board.

Figure 6-8 Reagent refrigeration board

6.6.8 Level Detection Board


There are two circuit boards for detecting the liquid level, one for reagent level
detection and the other for sample level detection; the function detail is:

 The two level detection boards have the same construction and interface and
detect the reagent level and sample level individually with the high reliability,
especially the sample level detection.
 The circuit boards generate the level detection signal which is sent to
three-probe driver board, when the probes touch the liquid level.
 This unit can protect the probe from vertical collision; it generates signal which is
sent to three-probe driver board.

6.6.9 Pump/Valve Driver Board


This circuit board receives signals from the three-probe control-driver board and then
generates the pumps and valves control signals to control pumps/valves for reagent
probe, sample probe and mixer unit. It can also control pump/valve for cuvette
washing. There are 15 pumps/valves in total.

Figure 6-9 shows the function framework of the pump and valve driver board.

6 Hardware 6-9
Figure 6-9 Pump/valve driver board

6.6.10 Reaction Disk Temperature Control Board


The reaction disk temperature control board collects signals from the reaction disk
temperature sensor and then converts them into digital signals. This board provides
an SPI interface and a heater power interface, and is connected to the three-disk
driver board via a slip ring.

6.6.11 Preheat Temperature Control Board


The preheat temperature control board processes and collects the signals from the
two wash solution temperature sensors and one environment temperature sensor,
and then converts them into digital signals. This board provides a SPI interface, and
is connected to the three-disk driver board via a slip ring.

6.6.12 Reaction Disk Heater Connection Board


The reaction disk heater connection board sends the signals from three-disk driver
board to reaction disk heater and temperature protection switch.

6.6.13 Simulate power connection board


The main function of the simulate power connection board is to provide separate
simulate power to the photometer system and connect the 5V power of the main
board and the photometer.

6.7 Power Supply Module


The power supply module converts AC power input into DC power needed by the
system, which includes: 5V (board logic power), A24V (ISE power), B24V (motor,
heater drive power), 24V fan (reagent cooling fan), A12V (light source power), B12V
(reagent refrigeration, board cooling fan), C12V (pump/valve drive power) and analog
±12V power.

The power system consists of 3 boards: 24V board, 12V board, and power
connection board.

The 24V board transforms the AC power to the A24V, B24V and 24VLAMP (the lamp
source).

The 12V board transforms the AC power to the other 12V (B12V and C12V) and 5V
as the system needs.

6-10 6 Hardware
The power connection board has the function of relaying the AC power, converting
analog ±12V, controlling the C12V ,support of A12V light source voltage and output
of the other voltages.

The power supply module provides all power through the interfaces on the power
connection board, and the 24V board, the 12V board and the connection board use
the plug board to board to connect.

The whole power system is an integrity module. It is shielded and isolated by the
metal enclosure.

The power supply module can be cooled by the fans.

6.7.1 Features of Power Supply Module

6.7.1.1 Input
 Input AC voltage: 100V-240VAC (fluctuation of ±10%)
 Frequency: 50/60 Hz (fluctuation of ±3Hz)
 Input power: 1KVA
 Max instantaneous current: <40A

6.7.1.2 DC Output: 5V – for Circuit Board


 Output current:8A
 Output voltage: 4.85-5.25V

6.7.1.3 DC Output: A12V – for Lamp


 Output voltage:5-12.5V
 Control request: A12V is controlled by an analog signal from the system; A12V is
available when the control signal is more than 1.5V; A12V changes linearly from
5V-12.5V when the control signal changes linearly from 2-4V. A12V output is 0
when the control signal is less than 1.5V.

6.7.1.4 DC Output: B12V – for Refrigeration and Fans


 Output current: 28A
 Output voltage: 11.4-12.6V

6.7.1.5 DC Output: C12V – for Pump /Valve Board


 Output current: 7A
 Output voltage: 11.4-12.6V

6.7.1.6 DC Output: -12V – for AD Conversion


 Output current: 0.3A
 Output voltage: -11.4- -12.6V

6 Hardware 6-11
6.7.1.7 DC Output: D12V – for AD Conversion, Temperature
Control
 Output current: 0.3A
 Output voltage: 11.4- 12.6V

6.7.1.8 DC Output: A24V – for ISE Unit


 Output current:1.3A
 Output voltage: 23.5-26V

6.7.1.9 DC Output: B24V – for Motor, Reaction Disk Heating,


Wash Solution Preheat
 Output current:21A
 Output voltage: 23.5-26V

6.7.1.10 DC Output: 24V Fan – for Reagent Cooling Fan


 Output current:1.2A
 Output voltage: 23.5-26V

6.7.2 Block Diagram


Figure 6-10 shows the framework of the power module.

Figure 6-10 Framework of power supply module

6-12 6 Hardware
6.8 Connection Diagram
Figure 6-11 Connection diagram 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

REV ECN DESCRIPTION DRAW CHECHK APPR DATE

D D

PC

Main control board

C C

AD conversion
ISE module DDB PDB
board

Power
assembly
Preheat Reagent level Sample level
Pre-amp Reagent/Sample
Slip ring temp control detection detection
board barcode module
board board board
B B

Reagent Reaction Reaction disk


Pump/Valve
refrigeration disk temp heater connection
drive board
board control board
board

APPROVALS DATE
DESIGN MINDRAY
CHECK
A TITLE A
Main unit wiring connection
机密:此图及其全部知识产权(含著作权)归深圳迈瑞生物医疗电子股份有限公司所有。未经深圳迈瑞生物医疗电子股份有限 CHECK
公司预先书面许可,严禁出于任何目的,对此图的全部或部分内容(包括但不限于图中信息、数据、运算结果等)使用、拷贝
File: Bytes: 或复制。 CHECK
CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time: herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions should be made of
this drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents
R&D
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003
contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics
CHIEF ENG. SHEET 1 OF 14 SIZE A3
Co.,Ltd.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware 6-13
Figure 6-12 Connection diagram 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Main unit power


D D
socket connection
BA40-21-73110 E
yellow Panel
green grounding
Power
socket Main Power switch
N light 1 4
blue 2 5
J7
L brown
1 4
Main switch J8
2 5
connection
BA40-20-73111

Power connection board


Analyzing unit switch
051-000511-00
connection
BA40-20-73112
1 B12VOUT 1
C Analyzing 3-carousel drive C
2 STCRL J2 Three-disk power
unit switch 2
control cable
board
BA40-21-61749 BA38-30-88045
J1 yellow 1 shield J1
black 2 CTL_LAMP
ISE power connection 2 1 2 1
blue 3 GND
BA38-20-88165 4 3 black 4 A12VOUT 4 3
white 5 GND
1 A24VOUT 5
1 6 5 brown 6 CTL_SLP 6
ISE module GND J3 red 7 CTL_WTP
2 8 7 8 7
2
yellow 8 CTL_VMP

Lamp connection
BA38-20-88187
1 A12VOUT
1
Lamp GND J16
2
2
B B

A
MINDRAY A

TITLE: Power board connection


File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 2 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Figure 6-13 Connection diagram 3

6-14 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3-disk drive board


051-001991-00
A24V is generated by 24V board and provided to

1
4
3

2
ISE module.

5
6
J8

10
12
11

9
8

7
D
B24V is generated by 24V board, and provided to D

3-disk drive board 3-carousel drive board,3-probe drive board, PDB,

1 B24VOUT

2 B24VOUT

3 B24VOUT

4 5VOUT
8 GND2

9 GND2

DGND

12 DGND
7 GND2

GND2
D12V
power cable pump/valve driver board.

-12V
BA40-21-61748

5
10

11
6
24VFAN is generated by 24V board, and provided
1 B24VOUT 1
3-probe drive board to reagent refrigeration board and fan.

1
2
3
10 4
11 5
12 6
2 B24VOUT 2 B24VOUT
1 1 power cable

7
8
9
3-probe drive
2 3 B24VOUT 3
2 BA40-21-61705
1 5VOUT 24VLAMP, generated by 12V board, generates
6 1 board
3 4 GND2 4 3 J15 6 1 6 GND2

4 5 GND2 5 4
2 B24VOUT 7 2 051-001990-00 A12V via DC/DC module in power connection
7 2 7 GND2
5 5
8 3 3 B24VOUT 8 3 board, and it is provided to lamp.
6
6 GND2 6
6 J14 8 GND2 J3
7 24VFAN 7 24VFAN 9 4 4 C12VOUT 9 4
24V power board 7 7
10 5
9 D12V B12V is generated by 12V board, and provided to
8 8 24VFAN- 8 8 5 -12V 10 5
051-000510-00 9 9
A24V J10 10 DGND reagent refrigeration board.
9 A24V 9
10 10
Connection between pump/valve
C
11
10 A24V- 10
11
driver board and power board
C12V is output by B12V via power connection C
11 24VCRL1 11
12
13 12 NC 12
12
13
BA38-20-88182 board, and provided to PDB, pump/valve driver
1 C12VOUT
14 14 3 C12VOUT
Pump/valve driver board, and reagent refrigeration board.
13 NC 13 2 1
15
14 AC_N 14
15 5
7
C12VOUT
C12VOUT
1 2 board D12V and -12V are converted on power
4 3
9 B24VOUT
3 4 BA38-30-88046 connection board by 14V generated from 12V
15 AC_L 15 6 5 11 B24VOUT 5 6
J4 8 7 12 B24VOUT J1 board, and provided to DDB connected to
2 GND2 7 8
Power connection board 10 9 4 GND2 9 10 temperature control board, main control board
6 GND2
1 B12Vout 1 051-000511-00 12 11
8 GND2 11 12 connected to pre-amp board and AD conversion
10 GND2
2 GND2 2 Reagent refrigeration
1 1 board power cable 1
board, PDB connected to clog detection board
3 GND2 3
2
4 5VOUT 4
2
BA40-20-61586
1 24VFAN+ red
(N/A in BA38).
3 3 3 1
4 5 5VOUT 5 4 3 1 2 24VFAN- black
4 2 J17 5VOUT is generated by 12V board, and provided
5 6 5VCRL 6 5 J9 4 2
3 C12VOUT yellow to DDB, PDB, and main control board.
6 6
7 GND1 7 4 GND2 green

12V power board


7 7 P1 Reagent
B 8 8 24VLAMP 8
8 J11 P1 B12V red B
051-000509-00 9 9 +14V 9 9
P1 P1 B12V red refrigeration board
10 10 -14V 10 10
P2 GND black BA40-30-61371
11 11
12
11 DGND 11
12
P2 P1 GND black P2
Reagent refrigeration board
13 12 NC 12 13
power cable 2
14 13 NC 13 14
15 15
BA40-20-61587 Simulate power 1 D12V
yello
Main control
w
14 AC_N 14
4 1
Simulate Connection board connection board 4 1 4 DGND white 1 4
15 AC_L 15 connection cable 2 -12V red board
J12 BA38-30-88342 2 5
J1 051-001799-00
5 2 5 2 5 DGND blue
BA38-20-88355red 1 1 3
3 5VOUT blue
6 3 6 GND2 black 3
2 4
J1 J2 6 3
3
6
5VOUT
GND2 black
3 6
Main control board
power cable
BA38-20-88354

A
MINDRAY A

TITLE: Power board connection


File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.1
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 3 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware 6-15
6-16
B

A
C
D

Date:
File:

1
1

Time:
Bytes:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

2
2
Figure 6-14 Connection diagram 4

Pre-amp board to AD

3
3

conversion board signal cable 1


BA40-20-61484
J2

J2

1 AGND white
1
2
1
2

2 SIG1 red
3 SIG2 yellow

BA40-20-73022
3
4
3
4

4 SIG3 green

control board connection


5 SIG4 gray

J8
AD conversion board to main
5
6
5
6

6 SIG5 blue
P1

1 +12V 7 SIG6 orange

1
7
8
7
8

14 +12V
8 SGND black

4
4

2 -12V
1

2
15 -12V
3 VCC
2

3
16 VCC Pre-amp board to AD
4 15GND
3

4
conversion board signal cable 2
17 15GND
J3

J3

5 GND BA40-20-61485
4

5
18 AD_BUSY

6 Hardware
6 AD_DIN 1 AGND
5

white
1
2
1
2

19 AD_CLK 2 SIG1
7 NC
red
6

20 AD_RC 3 SIG2 yellow


3
4
3
4

8 GND
7

4 SIG3
8

green
21 CH_A3
5 SIG4 gray
5
6
5
6

9 DCP_EN
8

5
9
5

BA40-30-61363
Pre-amp board

22 CH_A2 6 SIG5 blue


BA40-30-61365

10 DCP_CLK
9

7 SIG6 orange
7
8
7
8

23 CH_A1
Main control board 051-001799-00
AD conversion board

11 DCP_DIN 8 SGND black


24 CH_A0
12 NC
25 GND
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

13 GND
10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J1
J1

10 11 12 13

1 VDD red
1
1

6
6

2 AGND black
2
2

3 VSS blue
3
3

AD conversion board to pre-


amp board power cable
BA40-20-61486
SHEET
TITLE:

DWG NO.

7
7

4
OF
14
A-BA38-30-036
MINDRAY
board connection
8

REV
Pre-amp board, AD conversion

SIZE A3
1.0
B

A
C
D
Figure 6-15 Connection diagram 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3-probe drive board 3-disk drive board


051-001990-00 051-001991-00 Simulate power
D 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
J24
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 connection board
J27 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
D
BA38-30-88342

4
6
5
J2

1
3
2
Main control Main control board and 3-disk
board and PDB drive board connection

FPGA_CONF_OE
RSTCTL_REAC

yellow
connection BA40-20-61642

black
white
RSTCTL_RES

blue
blue
red
RSTCTL_RP

RSTCTL_RES

RSTCTL_ST

RSTCTL_RT
RSTCTL_AW

SPI_CLOCK
RSTCTL_TC
RSTCTL_MP

RXD_REAC
TXD_REAC
BA40-20-61641
RSTCTL_SP

SPI_DATA

NCONFIG
RXD_RES
TXD_RES
NCONFIG

RXD_RT
RXD_RES
Main control board

TXD_RT
RXD_AW

REV2_O
TXD_RES

TXD_ST
TXD_RP
TXD_AW

RXD_MP

RXD_ST
RXD_TC
RXD_RP

TXD_TC
TXD_MP

REV1_O

REV2_O

REV3_O

REV4_O

REV5_I
RXD_SP
TXD_SP

SPI_CS
REV5_I

REV6_I

DCLK

ASDO
DATA
DCLK

ASDO
power cable

DATA

GND

GND

GND

GND

NCE
NCS
GND
GND

GND

12VGND
12VGND
GND

GND

GND

GND

NCE
NCS
GND
GND

GND

BA38-20-88354

GND
+12V
-12V
+5V
33
34
29

31
21
13

23
11
12

20

24

28

32
10

14

26
27
11

22

25

30
10

15
9

16
5

19
33

8
34
29

31
9

18
6
1

17
3
21

23

25

27
12

20

24

28

32
22

26
13

30
14
5

16
2

15
7
6
1

3
4

17

19
18

3
2

6
4
5 4
6
5
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
J9 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 J10 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 J1

1
3
2
C C

Interface:J1 ~
Main control board J15
051-001799-00 FPGA JTAG: J12
FPGA AS: J13

J8 CPU BDM: J11


Reserved interface: J2、J5、
J7 J2
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J7、J9、J14
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9

Main control board and Connection between main


AD conversion board control board and serial port
Main control board and ISE
connection connection board
module connection
B BA30-20-06552 BA38-20-88166 B
BA38-20-88167

7 PC_RESET
red
10 DCP_CLK
18 AD_BUSY

11 DCP_DIN

2 PC_RXD
3 PC_TXD
19 AD_CLK

ISE COM
9 DCP_EN
6 AD_DIN

20 AD_RC

22 CH_A2

23 CH_A1

24 CH_A0
21 CH_A3
4 12GND
17 12GND

1 red

5 GND
25 GND
13 GND
1 +12V
14 +12V

5 GND

8 GND
16 VCC

12 NC

NC
15 -12V
3 VCC
2 -12V

7 NC

10 NC
1 NC

4 NC

6 NC

8 NC
9 NC
2
ISE_TXD
3
ISE_RXD
4
NC
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 5 2 4 6 8 10
P1 GND 1 3 5 7 9
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NC
7
ISE_CTS
8
Serial port
AD conversion board BA40- ISE_RTS connection port
9
30-61365 NC
10

MINDRAY
NC

A A

TITLE: Main control board connection


File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.1
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 5 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware 6-17
Figure 6-16 Connection diagram 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 Wash
7 8
Sample level Reagent level Conflux
tube level
DI water
high level
solution
low level
RM SM detection board detection board sensor High-concsensorDI water
sensor

Wash unit up/down stepper motor connection


BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369 waste
sensor
low level
sensor
BNC
J2 J2

Reagent level detection board


BA38-20-88186-01

Mixer DC motor connection

2
1

2
1

2
1
Sample level detection board
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 BNC
6brown B- 4brown

sensor connection
6

green

black
blue

2
1

2
1
BA38-20-88177
red

PDB and level


1 LEVEL green 3
BA38-20-88175

BA38-20-88174
1 LEVEL green 3

2 RAM_V_PHO 2
2 RAM_V_PHO 2

black 1
1 GND black 1

red 4
BA38-20-88173

red 4
Wash unit up/down 4orange B+ 3orange

connection
D 4

connection
D

black

black

black

black

black
stepper motor 3yellow A- 2yellow

4 CONFLUX red
3

12 REAG_L red
8 WATER_H red

10 WATER_L red
red
blue
blue
BA31-21-56814 1 1red A+ 1red

2 +12V
2 +12V
2 +6V
2 GND
1 GND

2 +6V

1 GND

6 THICK
Wash unit syringe stepper motor connection

11 GND
PDB and pump/valve driver

3 GND

5 GND

7 GND

9 GND
BA38-20-88186-07

NC
NC
board connection
5 5brown B- 4brown BA38-20-88176
4 4orange B+ 3orange 31~34 VCC

3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
Wash syringe motor 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3
34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4
1 2 1 2 1 3 5 7 9 11 30 GND
() 2 2yellow A- 2yellow 29 RPV
J30 J29

2
J21 J20 J23 J18 2 4 6 8 10 12 28 RPV

J4
1
1 1red A+ 1red 27 RPV

3
Reagent probe arm up/down motor connection J22 26 RPV

2
25 GND
BA38-20-88185-02

4
24 RPV

J5
6 6brown B- 4brown 23 PMIX

Pump/Valve driver
22 RPV
Reagent probe arm 4 4orange B+ 3orange

BA40-30-61373
21 RPV

4
20 GND

1
up/down motor 3 3yellow A- 2yellow 19 RPV
BA31-21-56816 18 RPV

board
2
1 1red A+ 1red 17 P1S

J7

J14
Reagent probe arm rotation motor 16 PIN

J14
connection 15 GND
14 P67S
BA38-20-88185-03

4
13 P8S
6 6brown B- 4brown
C Interface: J1~J24, J26~J32 12 POUT
11 P45S
C

1
Reagent probe arm 4 4orange B+ 3orange
FPGA AS: J1 10 GND
9 V34S
rotation motor

2
3 3yellow A- 2yellow
FPGA JTAG : J2 8 V12S

J8
BA31-21-56814 1 1red 1red
7 V56S

3
A+
Spared probe clog detection interface: J17, J24 6 VDI
5 GND
Reagent syringe motor connection 4
BA38-20-88225 PDB Spared pump/valve board interface: J31 4 P23S
3 VOUT
2 VRP
6 6brown
B- 4brown 051-001990-00 Spared level sensor interface: J19 1 VSP

1
2

1
2
1

Reagent syringe 5
5orange B+ 3orange Spared wash syringe motor: J6
Spared overflow detection interface: J13 24 GND black 2 K
2

motor 2 2yellow A- 2yellow 23 VCC red 1 Reagent probe horizontal


J9

A
22 GND green 3 collision detection sensor

3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
BA31-21-56814
3

1 1red A+ 1red 21 R_RAM_PHO white 4


E
C BA40-21-61735
20 GND black 2 K
4

Sample probe up/down motor connection 19 VCC red 1 Reagent probe rotational
A
BA38-20-88186-04 18 GND green 3 E home position sensor
6 6brown B- 4brown 17 RR_PHO white 4 C

J28
BA40-21-61733
4

16 GND black 2 K
Sample probe 4 4orange B+ 3orange 15 VCC red 1 A
Reagent up/down home
3

J10

14 GND green 3 position sensor


up/down motor 3 3yellow A- 2yellow 13 RU_PHO white 4
E
C BA40-21-61732
2

BA31-21-56816 1 1red
A+ 1red
12 GND black 2
K
11 VCC red 1 Sample probe horizontal
B A B
1

Sample probe rotation motor connection 10 GND green 3


E
collision detection sensor
9 S_RAM_PHO white 4 BA40-21-61735
BA38-20-88186-05 C
6brown B- 4brown 8 GND black 2 K
6 Sample probe rotational
4

7 VCC red 1 A
Sample probe 4 4orange B+ 3orange 6 GND green 3 E home position sensor
J11

5 RR_PHO white 4 BA40-21-61733


3

C
rotation motor 3yellow A- 2yellow J26
3 4 GND black 2 K Sample up/down home
BA31-21-56814 J12

1
2
J15 J16
2

3 VCC red 1
1red 1red 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 A
position sensor
1 A+ 2 GND green 3 E
4 3 2 1 1 RU_PHO white 4 BA40-21-61732
1

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 C
Mixer up/down motor connection

PDB and position sensor


connection 2
Mixer rotation motor connection
6 6brown B- 4brown

1 AWSR_PHO white 4
2 GND
3 VCC

5 RS_PHO white 4
6 GND
7 VCC

9 SS_PHO white 4
10 GND
11 VCC

13 AWH_PHO white 4 C
14 GND
15 VCC

17 H_RAM_PHO white 4 C
18 GND
19 VCC

21 AWS_PHO white 4
22 GND
23 VCC

25 RMU_PHO white 4 C
26 GND
27 VCC

29 RMR_PHO white 4 C
30 GND
31 VCC

33 MU_PHO white 4 C
34 GND
35 VCC

37 MR_PHO white 4 C
38 GND
39 VCC
BA38-20-88179
1red

4 GND

8 GND

12 GND

16 GND

20 GND

24 GND

28 GND

32 GND

36 GND

2
40 GND
1red
4orange B+ 3orange
6brown B- 4brown

3 3yellow A- 2yellow

3 3yellow A- 2yellow
1red
B+ 3orange
BA38-20-88185-04

3 3yellow A- 2yellow
Sample syringe motor

B+ 3orange
6 6brown B- 4brown
BA38-20-88186-06

BA38-20-88185-05

PDB and position sensor


connection

connection 1
A+

1 1red A+

A+

black 2
red 1
green 3
black 2
BA38-20-88178

red 1
green 3

black 2 K

black 2 K

black 2 K

black 2 K

black 2 K

black 2 K

black 2 K
red 1
green 3 E

green 3 E

green 3 E

green 3 E
red 1

red 1

red 1

red 1

red 1

red 1

red 1
green 3 E

green 3 E

green 3 E

green 3 E

black
4 4orange

4 4orange
1 1red

1 1red

C
E
ASpared wash syringe sensor
K
C
E
A
K Reagent syringe home
C

A
K Mixer rotational home
Wash block vertical collision

Wash syringe home position


MINDRAY

Wash block up/down home


6
4

Spared mixer rotational


Spared mixer up/down

Mixer up/down home


Sample syringe home

home position sensor

home position sensor


detection sensor
BA31-30-41501

BA31-30-41501

BA31-30-41501

BA31-30-41501

BA31-30-41501

BA40-21-61732

BA40-21-61732

BA40-21-61733
position sensor

position sensor

position sensor

position sensor

position sensor
BA31-30-41501

BA40-21-61733
A A

TITLE: PDB connection 1

sensor
Sample syringe Mixer up/down Mixer rotation
File: Bytes:
motor motor motor
BA31-21-56814 BA31-21-56816 BA31-21-56814 DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 6 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6-18 6 Hardware
Figure 6-17 Connection diagram 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D D
3-probe board and main control board
connection
BA40-20-61641

1 RXD_SP
2 TXD_SP J10
J27 3 RSTCTL_SP
4 GND
5 RXD_AW

2
6 TXD_AW
3-probe board power

4
7 RSTCTL_AW
cable
8 GND

6
BA40-21-61705 1 6 9 RXD_RP

8
10 TXD_RP
2 7 11 RSTCTL_RP

10

10
9

9
yellow
yellow

white
black
black
black
black
black 12 GND
blue

C C
red

3 8
J3

11

12

11

12
13 RXD_MP

051-001799-00
14 TXD_MP

Main control
13

14

13

14
4 9
15 RSTCTL_MP
10 GND
2 +24V
3 +24V
4 +12V

9 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
5 -12V
1 +5V

16

16
15

15
10 16 GND
5
3-probe drive board 17 RXD_RES

18

18
17

17
051-001990-00 18 TXD_RES

20

20
19

19
19 RSTCTL_RES
1 2 3 4 5 20 GND

22

22
21

21
J14 21 REV1_O

24

24
22 REV5_I

23

23
6 7 8 9 10
23 REV2_O

26

26
25

25
24 GND
Power board

27

28

27

28
25 REV3_O
051-000511-00 26 REV6_I

30

30
29

29
27 REV4_O
28 GND

32

32
31

31
29 DCLK
B B

34

34
33

33
30 NCONFIG
31 ASDO
32 DATA
33 NCS
34 NCE

A
MINDRAY A

TITLE: 3-probe board connection 2


File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 7 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware 6-19
Figure 6-18 Connection diagram 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D D

400ul reagent probe


Sample probe assembly
assembly
BA40-30-61525
BA40-30-73133

black

black
red

red
2 SIGN

2 SIGN
1 GND

1 GND
J1 1 2 J1 1 2

Sample level Reagent probe level


C C
detection board detection board
BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369

J2 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4

black 1

black 1
2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2

2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2
1 LEVEL green 3

1 LEVEL green 3
red 4

red 4
Sample level detection board and Reagent level detection board and
PDB connection PDB connection
BA38-20-88173 BA38-20-88174

2 +12V

2 +12V
1 GND

1 GND
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

J21 J20 J23 J18


B B
PDB
051-001990-00

A
MINDRAY A

TITLE: Level detection board connection


File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 8 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6-20 6 Hardware
Figure 6-19 Connection diagram 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Sample barcode Reagent barcode

3-disk board and sample

3-disk board and reagent


assembly assembly

BA38-20-88168
bar code cable

BA38-20-88169
BA40-30-61994 BA40-30-61986

bar code
D D

red

red
10 shield

10 shield
GND

8 TRIG

GND

8 TRIG
RXD

RXD
TXD

TXD
7 RTS

7 RTS
VCC

VCC
6 CTS

6 CTS
9 NC

9 NC
NC

NC
5

5
1
2
3

1
2
4

3
4
3-disk drive board and reaction disk
stepper motor connection
BA38-20-88185-01 J11 J12
6brown B- 4brown

1
6 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10
Reaction disk 5orange B+ 3orange 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9

2
5

J3
rotation motor 2 2yellow A- 2yellow

3
BA38-21-88094 1 1red A+ 1red

4
1 RXD_TC
2 TXD_TC
J24 3 RSTCTL_TC J10
4 GND
3-disk drive board and reagent disk 1 2 5 RXD_RES 1 2
stepper motor connection 3 4
6 TXD_RES
7 RSTCTL_RES 3 4
C BA38-20-88186-03 Interface:J1 ~ 5 6 8 GND C
5 6

1
6brown B- 4brown
6 9 RXD_ST
Reagent disk 4orangeB+ 3orange J27,J31 7 8 10 TXD_ST 7 8

2
4

J4

board051-001799-00
FPGA AS: J18 9 10 11 RSTCTL_ST 9 10
rotation motor

3
3 3yellow A- 2yellow 12 GND
11 12 13 RXD_RT 11 12
BA38-21-88094

Main control
1 1red 1red FPGA JTAG: J19

4
A+ 3-disk drive 13 14 14 TXD_RT 13 14
Reserved interface J13 ~ J16、 15 RSTCTL_RT
board 15 16 16 GND 15 16
J21,J25 17 18 17 RXD_REAC 17 18
051-001991-00 18 TXD_REAC
3-disk drive board and sample disk 19 20 19 RSTCTL_REAC 19 20
stepper motor connection 21 22 20 GND
21 FPGA_CONF_OE 21 22
BA38-20-88186-02 23 24
1

22 REV5_I 23 24
6brown B- 4brown
6 25 26 23 REV2_O
25 26
Sample disk
2

4orangeB+ 3orange 24 GND


J5

4 27 28 25 SPI_CS 27 28
rotation motor
3

2yellow 26 SPI_CLOCK
1 1red A- 29 30 29 30
27 SPI_DATA
BA38-21-88094
4

3 1red 31 32 28 GND
3yellowA+ 31 32
29 DCLK
33 34 30 NCONFIG 33 34
31 ASDO
B B
32 DATA
33 NCS
J8 34 NCE
J1 J22
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 3-disk board and main
1 2 3 4
control board connection

3-disk board and power board


7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8
cable

control connection cable


BA40-20-61642

yello
blac

red
w
k
BA40-21-61749
3-disk board and power
board power connection

alarm connection cableBA40-

3 P_FAN (NC)
3-disk board and fan error
BA40-20-61748

2 R_FAN
1 GND

4 VCC
8 SIGN yellow
brown

6 SIGN brown
yellow
yellow
yellow

black
black
blue
white

black
black
black
black

2 SIGN black

4 SIGN black
white
yellow
cable

3 GND blue

7 SIGN red

20-61750
11 GND
12 GND
10 GND
1 +24V
2 +24V
3 +24V

9 GND
7 GND
8 GND
5 +12V
6 -12V

5 GND
4 +5V

A
shield
1 1

J14
2 3 4
MINDRAY A
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 Reagent
J15 J1 TITLE: 3-disk drive board connection1
7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 refrigeration board
File: Bytes:
BA40-30-61371
Power board DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time: 051-000511-00
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 9 OF 14 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware 6-21
Figure 6-20 Connection diagram 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D D
Slip ring
BA38-21-

white-black(WHT-
BLK)11

ORN)14
white-orange(WHT-

GRN)16
white-green(WHT-
RED)13

VIO)18
red(RED)3
purple(VIO)8
white(WHT)10
white-red(WHT-

white-purple(WHT -
BRN)12
white-brown(WHT-
)4
black(BLK)1

blue(BLU)7
brown(BRN)2
yellow(YEL)5
green(GRN)
6
grey(GRY)9
orange(ORN

white-blue(WHT-
BLU)17
YEL)15
white-yellow(WHT-
DDB and slip ring connection DDB and slip ring connection 2
1 BA38-20-88184
BA38-20-88183

DOUT_AD_REA
BUSY_AD_REA
1 SYNC_AD_REA

Heat_dish1
CLK_AD_REA

Heat_dish2
DIN_AD_REA

Heat_dish3
AGND

+24V
A_REA

+24V
B_REA

+12V
GND

NC
10

5
2

6
7
3
4
5

8
9

6
4
3
2
1
DDB and position sensor
1 connection
C NC C
2 BA38-20-88172
Preheat temp control board and DDB 1 3 5 7 9
1 2 3 4 3
NC
5 6 NC
connection 4 NC
2 4 6 8 10
BA38-20-88170 5 NC
J21 J10 6 NC
1 2 7 NC
8 NC
3 4
2

9 VCC 1red
4 SYNC_ADT_AU 1 5 6 A Sample disk home

1
10 ST_PHO 4white
4
3

8 A_AU 2 C
3 DIN_ADT_AU 3 7 8 11 GND 2black K position sensor
12 GND 3green

4
3
BA38-20-88228

10 E
6
5

B_AU 4 BA40-21-61760
control board
Preheat temp

6 CLK_ADT_AU 5 9 10
13 VCC 1red

6
5
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
7

12 C_AU 6 11 12 A Sample disk encoder


7 7 14 STC_PHO 4white
BUSY_ADT_AU
J20 15 GND 2black C
sensor

8 10 12 14
7
9 11 13 15 17 19

5 DOUT_ADT_AU 8 13 14 K
NC 9 DDB 16 GND 3green E BA40-21-61761
J5 13

9 11 13
GND 10 J26 15 16
11 +12V 11 051-001991-00 17 18
17
18
VCC
REAC_PHO
1red
4white A Reaction disk home
14 AGND 12 C
NC 13 19 GND 2black K position sensor
NC 14 19 20 20 GND 3green E BA40-21-61760
21 22
21 VCC 1red
23 24 22 REACC_PHO 4white AReaction disk encoder
C
23 GND 2black K sensor
B 25 26 24 GND 3green E B
BA40-21-61761
27 28 1red
25 VCC
A Reagent carousel home
29 30 26 RT_PHO 4white C
27 GND 2black position sensor
K BA40-21-61760
31 32 28 GND 3green E
J9 29 1red
33 34 VCC
AReagent disk encoder
30 RTC_PHO 4white C
1 2 3 4 5 31 GND 2black sensor
6 K
32 GND 3green E BA40-21-61761
7 8 9 33 NC
10 11 12 34 NC

1red Wash solution preheater 100W


1 CA_W_1
7 VCC 2white connection
BA40-21-61522
2 VCC 1black Preheater temp switch connection
8 VCC
DI water preheat, temperature 2green BA40-21-61659
switch connection 5 1red

MINDRAY
CA_W_2
11 VCC 2white Wash solution preheater 100W connection
BA38-20-88171 BA40-21-61522

A 6 VCC 1black Preheater temp switch connection A


12 VCC 2green BA40-21-61659 DDB connection 2
TITLE:
2
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 10 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6-22 6 Hardware
Figure 6-21 Connection diagram 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD brown( BRN) 2


Reaction disk sensor
D 2 REF D
1 connection 2 J1 2
3 SENSOR
BA38-21-88162 3 3 GND red( RED) 3
J5 4 GND

1 2 5 GND purple( VIO) 8


1 SHIELD 1
Reaction disk sensor 3 4 6 GND white( WHT) 10

Slip ring to reaction disk temperature control board,


2 connection 2 REF
2
J2
3 SENSOR
Reaction disk temp. 5 6 7 S2_A white-black( WHT- BLK) 11
BA38-21-88163 3 control board 8 S2_B white-brown( WHT- BRN) 12
7 8
BA38-30-87909

and reaction disk heater connection


9 SYNC_AD orange( ORN) 4
9 10
10 BUSY_AD yellow( YEL) 5
11 12
1 SHIELD 1
Reaction disk sensor J3 11 DOUT_AD green( GRN) 6
2 REF 13 14

BA38-21-88189
3 connection 2
DIN_AD
3 SENSOR 12 black( BLK) 1
BA38-21-88163 3
15 16
13 CLK_AD blue( BLU) 7
C 17 18 C
GND white-red( WHT- RED)
14
19 20 13
15 GND White-purple( WHT - VIO) 18
(Fixed to reaction blac GN
1 1 GND
disk with M3 pan k D
J4
16
head screw) Reaction disk 2 17 VPP gray( GRY) 9
grounding cable
18 VPP
BA38-20-88223
19 GND

20 GND

Reaction disk temp.


B B
protection switch
1
connection 1 24V white-yellow( WHT- YEL) 15
J3 1
BA40-21-61673 2 2 24V white-blue( WHT- BLU) 17
Reaction disk heater Reaction disk heater J1 2
white-orange( WHT- ORN) 14
3 CTRL
connection connection board 3
white-green( WHT- GRN)
Reaction disk heater BA38-21-88222 1 BA38-30-87925 4
4 CTRL
16
J2
BA38-21-88222 2

A
MINDRAY A
Reaction disk temperature
TITLE:
control board connection
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET11 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware 6-23
Figure 6-22 Connection diagram 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D D

1 SHIELD 1
Preheat sensor 1
2 REF
connection 2 J1 Preheat temperature control board and
BA38-20-88221 3 SENSOR DDB connection
3
BA38-20-88170

1
4 SYNC_ADT_AU 1

1
4
3
8 A_AU 2
3 DIN_ADT_AU 3
1 SHIELD

4
3
1 10

6
5
B_AU 4
Preheat sensor 1 Preheat temperature 6 CLK_ADT_AU 5
2 REF J2

6
5
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
7
connection 2 12 C_AU 6
C 3 SENSOR control board 7 BUSY_ADT_AU 7 J20 C

8 10 12 14
7
9 11 13 15 17 19
BA38-20-88221 5 DOUT_ADT_AU 8 DDB
3 BA38-20-88228 J5 13
NC 9

9 11 13
GND 10
11 +12V 11 051-001991-00
14 AGND 12
NC 13
NC 14
Environment 1 SHIELD 1
temperature sensor 2 REF J3
2
connection 3 SENSOR
3
BA38-21-88224

B B

A
MINDRAY A
Preheat temperature control
TITLE:
board connection
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 12 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6-24 6 Hardware
Figure 6-23 Connection diagram 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Semi-
Reagent refrigeration Semi-conductive Semi-conductive Semi-conductive
conductive
temperature sensor connection cooler cable cooler cable cooler cable
cooler
D BA30-21-15175 BA40-21-61655 BA40-21-61655 BA40-21-61655
BA30-10-06633 D

2 black

2 black

2 black

2 black

2 black
1 red

1 red

1 red

1 red

1 red
Semi-conductive

BA38-20-88220
Reagent refrigeration sensor

cooler cable
and reagent refrigeration chip

control

control

control

control
VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC
connection BA40-20-61648

2 black

1 black

2 black

3 black

4 black
1 red

5 red

6 red

7 red

8 red
Reagent refrigeration 1 2 3 4
board power cable 1 1 2
BA40-20-61586 5 6 7 8
J1
1 24V red
1 1 J3
2 FGND black
2 2
C J9 3 12VFAN yellow
J12 C
3 3
051-000511-00
Power board

4 SGND green
4 4
Reagent
1 12V red 1 refrigeration
P1 board
2 12V red 2 J22

3-disk drive board


BA40-30-61371

051-001991-00
1 black GND 1 black
1 1
3 GND black 1
2 yellow R_FAN 2 yellow
4 GND black 2 P2 2 2
J14 3 P_FAN 3
3 3

Reagent refrigeration J13 J2 J5 J6 J15 4 4 red VCC 4 red 4


board power cable 2
BA40-20-61587 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4
3-disk board and fan error
B warning connection B
2 yellow

refrigeration board connection


1 black
1 black

1 black

1 black

1 black
refrigeration board connectio

BA40-20-61750
Refrigeration fan and reagent

2 red

Anti-fog circuit and reagent


3 red

2 red

2 red

4 red
3
Note: BA38 has no P_FAN
Lamp fan and reagent

2
refrigeration board

(air pump fan warning)


BA38-20-88188

BA40-20-61644
BA40-20-61650

DATA
connection

VCC

GND
GND

GND

GND

GND
VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC
2 yellow

1 black
1 black

1 black

1 black

1 black
2 red
3 red

2 red

2 red

2 red
2

1
Anti-fog
Refrigeration fan Anti-fog heater
Lamp fan PCB fan connection PCB fan connection temperature switch
connection connection
M07-00062S--- BA40-21-61653 BA40-21-61653 connection
BA40-20-61649 BA40-21-61643
BA40-21-61645

A
MINDRAY A
Reagent refrigeration board
TITLE: connection
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 13 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware 6-25
Figure 6-24 Connection diagram 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pump/Valve drive board and 3-probe


drive board cable
Pump/Valve drive board and
BA38-20-88176
D power board connection D
BA38-20-88182 1 VSP
1 +12V
J4 2 GND J2 2 VRP
3 VOUT
1 2 3 +12V 4 P23S J14

Power board-
1 2
4 GND

000511-00
1 2 5 GND
3 4 5 +12V 3 4 1 2
6 VDI
6 GND 3 4
5 6
7 +12V 5 6 J1 7 V56S
3 4
5 6 8 V12S
7 8 8 GND 7 8 5 6
9 V34S
9 10 9 +24V 7 8
10 GND 9 10 10 GND
7 8
11 P45S
11 12 11 +24V 9 10
11 12 12 POUT 9 10
12 +24V 11 12 13 P8S
11 12

051-001990-00
14 P67S
13 14
15 GND 13 14
15 16 16 PIN
Pump/Valve drive board 15 16

PDB
17 P1S
17 18 18 SIGN
and valve connection 17 18
1 2 19 20 19 SIGN
BA38-20-88180 20 GND 19 20
red 12V 11 3 4 21 22 21 SIGN
Sample probe int valve black VSP 12
21 22
5 6 23 24 22 SIGN
23 PMIX 23 24
C red 12V 15 25 26 C
Probe ext wash valve black VOUT 7 8 24 SIGN
16 25 26
9 10 27 28 25 GND
Phase 1, 2 injection red 12V 17 26 SIGN 27 28
black V12S 18 11 12 29 30 27 SIGN
valve 29 30
Phase3, 4 injection red 12V 19 13 14 31 32 28 SIGN
31 32
black V34S 20 29 SIGN
valve 15 16 33 34 30 GND
33 34
Reagent probe int red
black
12V
VRP
21
22 17 18
Pump/Valve drive 31 VCC
valve J9 board 32 VCC
Phase5, 6 injection red 12V 23 19 20 33 VCC

valve
black V56S 24
21 22 BA40-30-61373 34 VCC

23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
Pump/Valve drive board
and pump connection
B BA38-20-88181 B
red 12V 1
Phase 2, 3 waste pump black P23S 2 1 2
red 12V 3 3 4
Phase 8 waste pump black P8S 4 Inlet solenoid valve
5 6
red 12V 5 J14 cable
Mixer wash pump black V34S 6
7 8
9 10
1 BA38-20-88236 Water inlet
11 12 2 solenoid
J12
red 12V 11 13 14
Probe ext wash pump black POUT 12
15 16 BA40-21-61663
red 12V 13
Phase 4, 5 waste pump black P45S 14 17 18
red 12V 17 19 20
Phase 6, 7 waste pump black P67S 18
21 22
red 12V 19 23 24
Probe int wash pump

MINDRAY
black PIN 20
25 26
red 12V 21
Phase 1 waste pump black P1S 22
A A
Pump/Valve drive board
TITLE:
connection
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date: Time:

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 14 OF 14 SIZE A3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6-26 6 Hardware
6.9 Board Indication Light
Table 6-2 Indication Light for Each Board
Indication light
Light on Light off Remark
board mark
Main board (051-001799-00)
5V power works 5V power works
D4_+5V
normally abnormally
+12V power works +12V power works
D3_+12V
normally abnormally
-12V power works -12V power works
D1_-12V
normally abnormally
3.3V power works 3.3V power works
D2_3.3V
normally abnormally
Three-disk driver board (051-001991-00)
24V power works 24V power works
D20_+24V
normally abnormally
5V power works 5V power works
D21_+5V
normally abnormally
-12V power works -12V power works
D23_-12V
normally abnormally
12V power works 12V power works
D22_+12V
normally abnormally
3.3V power works 3.3V power works
D25_+3.3V
normally abnormally
Analog 5V power Analog 5V power
D30
works normally works abnormally
D31 Preheat heater on Preheat heater off
D32 Preheat heater on Preheat heater off
D33 / / Spared
D34 / /
D35 / /
D36 Reaction disk Reaction disk heater
heater on off
D38 / / Spared
D39 / / Spared
D40 / / Spared
Three-probe driver board (051-001990-00)
3.3V power works 3.3V power works
D1
normally abnormally
-12V power works -12V power works
D2
normally abnormally
5V power works 5V power works
D3
normally abnormally
+12V power works C12V power works
D4
normally abnormally
24V power works 24V power works
D5
normally abnormally
Spared mixing unit
D8 / / MUC working
indication
Spared sample probe
D9 / / unit MUC working
indication
D10 / / Spared reagent probe

6 Hardware 6-27
Indication light
Light on Light off Remark
board mark
unit MUC working
indication
Spared wash unit
D11 / / MUC working
indication
Level detection board (051-000360-00,051-000361-00)
Level signal output
when conductive
Level signal
D5 No level signal material contacts
detected
probe, such as hand,
metal
Voltage control
Voltage control Adjust indication light.
voltage is greater
D2 voltage is less than Adjust VR1 to change
than reference
reference value D2 from on to off
value
Reaction disk temperature control board (BA38-30-87909)
12V power works 12V power works
D1
normally abnormally
Preheat temperature control board (BA38-30-88228)
5V power works 5V power works
D1_5V
normally abnormally
12V power works 12V power works
D2_12V
normally abnormally
Pre-amp board (BA40-30-61363)
No indication
light
AD conversion board (BA40-30-61365)
12V power works 12V power works
D13
normally abnormally
-12V power works -12V power works
D14
normally abnormally
5V power works 5V power works
D15
normally abnormally
Pump and valve driver board (BA40-30-61373)
J2 input 5V works J2 input 5V works
D1
normally abnormally
C12V power works C12V power works
D2
normally abnormally
24V power works 24V power works
D3
normally abnormally
J2 input 5V works J2 input 5V works
D28
normally abnormally
Reagent refrigeration board (051-000052-00)
12V FAN power 12V FAN power
D2_12VFAN C12V
works normally works abnormally
B12V power works B12V power works Reagent refrigeration
D3_12V
normally abnormally power supply
5V power works 5V power works
D4_5V
normally abnormally
24V power works 24V power works
D5_24V 24VFAN
normally abnormally
Reagent
Other status of
refrigeration
temperature reagent refrigeration
D6 RED_LED
temperature sensor
sensor
temperature
temperature T>4℃
D8 Reagent Other status of YELLOW_LED

6-28 6 Hardware
Indication light
Light on Light off Remark
board mark
refrigeration reagent refrigeration
temperature temperature sensor
sensor temperature
temperature T<2℃
Reagent
refrigeration Other status of
temperature reagent refrigeration
D7 sensor GREEN_LED
temperature sensor
temperature 2℃ temperature
<T<4℃
Refrigeration chip Refrigeration chip Foot 3, 4 connected
D9
is working stand-by to J3
Refrigeration chip Refrigeration chip Foot 1, 2 connected
D11
is working stand-by to J3
12V power board (051-000509-00)
D20 5V output normal 5V no output
B12V output Refrigeration power
D21 B12V no output
normal supply
Power connection
24VLAMP output board converted to
D34 24VLAMP no output
normal light source power
supply
24Vpower board (051-000510-00)
A24V output
LED1 A24V no output ISE power supply
normal
24VFAN output Cooling fan power
LED2 24VFAN no output
normal supply
B24V output
LED3 B24V no output Motor power
normal
Power connection board (051-000511-00)
Analog 12V output Analog 12V no
D20_D12V
normal output
Analog -12V output Analog -12V no
D14_-12V
normal output
B12V output Reagent refrigeration
D11_B12V B12V no output
normal power supply
A12V output Light source power
D10_A12V A12V no output
normal supply
A24V output
D15_A24V A24V no output ISE power supply
normal
C12V output Pump, valve, and fan
D12_C12V C12V no output
normal power supply
D13_5V 5V output normal 5V no output
B24V output
D9_B24V B24V no output Motor power
normal
24VFAN output Reagent refrigeration
D21_24VFAN 24VFAN no output
normal fan power supply

6 Hardware 6-29
Figure 6-25 Main board

6-30 6 Hardware
Figure 6-26 Three-disk driver board

6 Hardware 6-31
Figure 6-27 Three-probe driver board

6-32 6 Hardware
Figure 6-28 AD conversion board

6 Hardware 6-33
Figure 6-29 Reagent refrigeration board

6-34 6 Hardware
Figure 6-30 Level detection board

6 Hardware 6-35
Figure 6-31 Pump/Valve driver board

6-36 6 Hardware
Figure 6-32 Reaction disk temperature control board

6 Hardware 6-37
Figure 6-33 Preheat temperature control board

6-38 6 Hardware
Figure 6-34 12V Power board

6 Hardware 6-39
Figure 6-35 24V Power board

6-40 6 Hardware
Figure 6-36 Power connection board

6 Hardware 6-41
For Your Notes

6-42 6 Hardware
7 Service and Maintenance

To ensure reliability, good performance and service life of the system, regular
maintenance is required. Be sure to follow the instructions given below to maintain
the system. Even you are only an operator, it is very important for you to learn this
chapter. Your thorough understanding will help you obtaining the best performance of
the system.

WARNING:
Do not perform any maintenance procedures that are not described
in this chapter.
Do not touch the components other than the ones specified in this
chapter.
Performing unauthorized maintenance procedures may damage your
system, void any applicable warranty or service contract and even
cause personal injury.
After performing any maintenance actions or procedures, ensure that
the system runs normally.
Do not spill water or reagent on mechanical or electrical components
of the system.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles during
maintaining process.

7.1 Preparation
The following tools, wash solution and ethanol may facilitate your maintenance.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-1


7.1.1 Tools
 Hex wrenches (M1.5, M3 and M4)
 Cross-headed screwdrivers (large, medium and small)
 Hexagon offset ring screw driver
 Needle tube
 Tweezers
 Clean gauze

7.1.2 Wash Solution


 Acid: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid
 Alkaline: Concentrated wash solution.

WARNING:
Poisonous gas will be produced if acid wash solution is mixed with
alkaline wash solution. Do not mix the acid wash solution with the
alkaline one.

CAUTION:
Mindray has specified the following enhanced wash solutions:
Acid wash solution: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid;
Alkaline wash solution: Concentrated wash solution.
Be sure to use the enhanced wash solution specified by Mindray.
Otherwise, proper result may not be obtained.
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline wash solutions be used
alternately. For instance, if the acid wash solution is used at current
startup, the alkaline one should be used at next startup.

7.2 Daily Maintenance


7.2.1 Checking Connection of Deionized Water

1 Check DI water connector for leakage. If leakage does exist, plug the
tubing tight, and use clean gauze to wipe off the water .

7-2 7 Service and Maintenance


2 Check and ensure there is enough DI water in water treatment system
water tank (or other external water reservoir).

3 Check and ensure there is no bending or leakage in tubing.

4 Check and ensure water treatment system and pressure module are
powered on.

7.2.2 Checking Waste Tubing

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves and lab coat
and, if necessary, goggles when checking the waste tubing.

Check if the waste drainage system works normally every day. Ensure the waste
tubing is neither bent nor clogged, and the high-/low-concentration waste is handled
properly according to local regulations and rules for waste disposal.

CAUTION:
Ensure the waste tubing is neither clogged nor bent. Clogged or bent
waste tubing may lead to waste overflow that can damage your
analyzer.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-3


7.2.3 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes
Follow this procedure to check the sample and reagent syringes. The purpose of this
check is to ensure the syringes do not leak.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the one reagent syringe
on the right and one sample syringe on the left.
Check whether the T-piece leaks.
3
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, check the cause. Replace tubing, T-piece, or connector if
necessary.
4 Check whether the plunger guide cap leaks.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, replace the cap as instructed by 7.7.8 Replacing Syringe
Assembly .
5
Close the front doors of the analyzer.

7.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Reset and then click Execute to
clean the sample probe.

2 Check if the flow from inside the sample probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the sample probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the sample probe as instructed by 7.7.2.2 Unclogging
Sample Probe. If the flow remains abnormal, contact our customer
service department or your local distributor.

7.2.5 Checking/Cleaning Reagent Probe

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Reset and then click Execute to
clean the reagent probe.

2 Check if the flow from inside the reagent probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the reagent probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the reagent probe as instructed by 7.7.2.2 Unclogging
Reagent Probe. If the flow remains abnormal, contact our customer
service department or your local distributor.

7-4 7 Service and Maintenance


7.2.6 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Reset and then click Execute to
clean the mixer.

2 During the cleaning process, check whether the mixer rotates correctly
and water surge in the wash well of mixer works normally. If rotation is
abnormal, check if the mixer is bent or loose. If water surge is abnormal,
check if exterior wash connection is correct.

7.2.7 Checking Printer/Printing Paper


Check if the power and status indicators on the printer are illuminated correctly, and if
sufficient paper is prepared.

7.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper


Check if the power and status indicators on the printer are illuminated correctly, and if
sufficient paper is prepared.

7.2.9 ISE Unit (optional)

7.2.9.1 Daily Cleaning

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the below checks.
The cleaning solution is irritating to eyes and skin. Avoid contact with
skin and eyes. In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of water and seek medical advice.

CAUTION:
Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables
may degrade system performance.
Add solution supplied in the cleaning solution kit to top of label on the
powder bottle that is also supplied in the same kit and shake well to
prepare the cleaning solution.
The cleaning solution must be stored at 2-8°C and discarded after two
weeks.

NOTE:
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
You should perform the maintenance once a day after all the samples
are analyzed. Besides, if the samples of a day requested for the ISE
tests are 50 or more, you should perform the maintenance after 50
samples are analyzed.
If you give the electrodes some time to stabilize after cleaning, you will
experience slightly better performance.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-5


1 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.
2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start the
clean cycle.
4 After cleaning, if there are samples requested for the ISE tests to be run,
calibration should be run first. But Mindray recommends running an ISE
calibration after cleaning.

ISE unit daily cleaning can be configured to operate automatically.

7.2.9.2 Pump Calibration


1 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.
2 Select Pump Calibration Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start
calibrating the peristaltic pumps.

Pump calibration can be configured to operate automatically.

7.3 Weekly Maintenance


7.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Remove the cover from the sample compartment and remove the sample
disk.

3 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the probe
arm to move the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment
and convenient to operate.

7-6 7 Service and Maintenance


4 CAUTION:
The tweezers may scratch the probe. Exercise caution when
using it to clean the probe. Avoid direct contact between the
tweezers and the probe. Do not use excessive force when
cleaning the probe. Otherwise it may bend.

NOTE:
We recommend the acid and alkaline detergents be used
alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid detergent
has been used for last maintenance, the alkaline detergent
had better be used for this time.

Use ethanol-dipped gauze to gently clean the exterior of the sample probe
until it is clean and smooth.
Wipe the sample probe with DI water-dipped gauze.
5
6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to
move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After cleaning the sample probe, be sure to move it to
a position above the sample probe wash well.
7 Install the sample disk, tighten the two retaining screws on it and then cover
the sample compartment.
8
Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the sample
probe and rinse it with deionized water.

7.3.2 Cleaning Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk by pulling
upwards the handles.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-7


3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
convenient to operate.

4 CAUTION:
Do not contact the reagent probe directly with tweezers;
otherwise the reagent probe may be scratched. Excessive
force may bend the reagent probe.

NOTE:
We recommend the acid and alkaline wash solution be used
alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid wash
solution is used for last maintenance, the alkaline one should
be used for this time.

Use ethanol-dipped gauze to gently wipe the exterior of reagent probe


until it is clean and smooth.
Wipe the reagent probe with DI water-dipped gauze.
5
6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
7 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.
8
Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the
reagent probe and rinse it with deionized water.

7.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Pull the mixer arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the arm to move the
mixer to a position convenient to operate.

7-8 7 Service and Maintenance


3 CAUTION:
The tweezers can scratch the mixer. Exercise caution when
using the tweezers to clean the mixer. Avoid direct contact
between the tweezers and the mixer. Do not use excessive
force when cleaning the mixer. Otherwise it may bend.

NOTE:
We recommend the acid and alkaline detergents be used
alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid detergent
has been used for last maintenance, the alkaline detergent
had better be used for this time.

Use ethanol-dipped gauze to gently clean the mixer until it is clean and
smooth.
Wipe the mixer with DI water-dipped gauze.
4
5 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.
6 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the mixer
automatically and rinse it with deionized water.

CAUTION:
The mixer is precisely fabricated. In case of scratched or bent mixer,
replace it according to 7.7.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers.

7.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader Windows

CAUTION:
Do not stare at the laser of the bar code reader; otherwise your eyes
may get hurt.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Uncover the reagent or sample compartment, and remove the reagent disk
or sample disk.

3 Use the DI water-dipped gauze to wipe the bar code reader window.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-9


Bar code
reader window

4 Install the reagent disk or sample disk and cover the compartment.

5 Place the Power to ON. After about 30 seconds, the system will reset
automatically.

CAUTION:
Do not use sharp-edged tools to scratch the bar code reader window.

7.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Remove the cover from the sample compartment and remove the sample
disk by pulling upwards the handle.

3 Rinse the sample disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.

4 Use clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary) to clean


the inside of the compartment.

5 Install the sample disk and tighten the two retaining screws on it. Then
cover the sample compartment.

7-10 7 Service and Maintenance


7.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and loosen the screws on the reagent
disk. Then remove the reagent disk.

3 Wash the reagent disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.

4 Use clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary) to clean


the inside of the compartment.

5 Install the reagent disk and together the screws on it. Then cover the
reagent compartment.

7.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit

WARNING:
The probe/mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe/mixer.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.


2 Use clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary) to clean
the panels.

7.3.8 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes


In order to clean built-up dirt inside the cuvette, and prolong the life span of the
cuvettes, it is necessary to clean the cuvettes.

1 Place a 40ml bottle filled with wash solution(CD80 stock solution) on


specified position of reagent disk.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-11


2 On the Daily Maint. page, select Cuvette Cleaning and then click
Execute. All cuvettes on the reaction disk are washed.

7.3.9 Checking Photometer


Reaction cuvettes and light source should be checked regularly and replaced if
necessary, for contaminated reaction cuvettes and low transmittance may affect the
test results; also weak stability and radiation intensity of the light source will cause
unreliable test results.

Aside from the regular check, checking should be done after the replacement of
cuvettes and lamp.

7.3.9.1 Checking Reaction Cuvettes


After performing enhanced wash of the reaction cuvettes, proceed with the following
steps to check the cuvettes.

1 Go to Utilities -- Daily Maint. page; then select Cuvette/Lamp Check in the


Maintenance area.

2 Make sure lamp is stable (10 minutes after start up).

3 Select Execute.
Cuvette check
4
The photometer check includes cuvette check and lamp check. Select
cuvette check first.
Time for cuvette check: 20 mins

7-12 7 Service and Maintenance


On this page, you can view the status of the latest cuvette check.
Different status is marked as two different colors:
Not marked: Normal
Red: out of consistence limit (compared with the cuvette of min ABS, the
difference is above 2500)

NOTE:
To ensure the good performance of the photometer, replace
those cuvettes marked with red. Run cuvette check after
replacement, and save the data.
Place DI water in position W. Click Start. After 20-minute test, the cuvette
status will be refreshed according to the test result. Click Save to save the
result.

NOTE:
If Save is not selected, the current test result will not be saved.
Next time when you enter this page, the cuvette status will be the
previous test result.
Click Results to view and print the latest ABS value of all the cuvette.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-13


Double click cuvette button on Photometer Check page, to view latest two
cuvette check record (Absorbance value) and check time, including
absorbance values of all 12 wavelengths.

7-14 7 Service and Maintenance


7.3.9.2 Checking Lamp

1 Enter the Daily Maint. page of the Utilities screen; then select Cuvette/Lamp
Check in the Maintenance area. Click Execute to enter Photometer Check
page.

2 Select Lamp check to enter following page.

NOTE:
Before running lamp check, replace those cuvettes marked with
red.

3 Ensure lamp is steady (10mins after powering on).

7 Service and Maintenance 7-15


4 Click Start to start the lamp check. Time for lamp check is 1.5mins. The test
result and the lamp status will be refreshed after the test. Click Save to save
the result.

NOTE:
If Save is not selected, the current test result will not be saved.
Next time when you enter this page, the lamp status will be the
previous test result.

In Lamp check page, you can view the latest two lamp check results. The
displayed value is the average of three consecutive cuvette absorbance.
When this value is greater than the calculated threshold value, the lamp
intensity is not strong enough. (The calculated threshold value can be queried
through Maintenance  System Maintenance  Light Source Setup.)

NOTE:
To ensure the good performance of the photometer, replace the
lamp when the light intensity is not strong enough.

5 After replacing lamp, if the value of water blank is greater than 63000, then
adjust the gain: adjust water blank to 47000~49000, with the gain parameters
in 340nm channel no less than 50. Refer to 4.7.3.3 for more information.

7.4 Monthly Maintenance


7.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point. Rotate the arm to move the
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
convenient to operate.
Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton swabs.
3

7-16 7 Service and Maintenance


4 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to
move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After cleaning the sample probe, be sure to move it to
a position above the sample probe wash well.

5
Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the sample probe automatically.

7.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point. Rotate the arm to move
the reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
convenient to operate.

3 Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton swabs.

After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to
4
move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
5
Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the reagent probes automatically.

7.4.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers

WARNING:
The mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the mixer.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-17


BIOHZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Pull the mixer arm to the highest point. Rotate the arm to move the mixer
to a position convenient to operate.

3 Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton swabs.

4 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.

5 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the mixers automatically.

7.4.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

1 Place the Power to OFF.


2 Pull the probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
convenient to operate.
3 Wipe the sample probe rotor with clean gauze.

7.4.5 Cleaning Reagent Probe Rotor

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

7-18 7 Service and Maintenance


BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.


2 Pull the probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
convenient to operate.
3 Wipe the reagent probe rotor with clean gauze.

7.4.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors

WARNING:
The mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the mixer.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.


2 Pull the mixer arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
mixer to a position convenient to operate.
3 Wipe the mixer rotor with clean gauze.

7.4.7 Checking and Maintaining Wash Unit


Cleaning wipe blocks is a monthly maintenance. User can finish the procedure in
following steps:

7.4.7.1 Checking Wash Unit


1 On the Daily Maint. page, select Wash Unit Maintenance and then click
Execute.
2 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening
and the lower part to other wash probes. Adjust the wipe block if
necessary.
3 Check the wash probes for stains and cracks. Clean or replace the probes
if any.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-19


7.4.7.2 Cleaning and Adjusting Wipe Blocks
1 Make sure the Power is placed to OFF.
2 Loosen the retaining screws of wash unit, and take off the wash unit from the
support.

3
Use clean gauze dipped with ethanol to gently wipe the wipe blocks of last two
phases, so as to wipe off dust and other contaminators.
Then use clean gauze dipped with deionized water to clean the wipe blocks
repeatedly, till the surface is clean and smooth.

NOTE:
Exercise caution. Excessive force may change the direction of
wipe blocks.

7-20 7 Service and Maintenance


4
Reinstall the wash unit to the support. Two locating pins on the support should
be inserted to two locating holes of wash unit. Then tighten the retaining screws
with hand.

5
Push wash unit to move vertically with hand, to have it drop to top of cuvette.
Observe if the four sides of wipe block are level with the cuvette. If not, shift the
angle of wipe block on wash unit a little to make them level. The thinner part of
wipe block should face forward.

7.5 Three-month Maintenance


7.5.1 Washing Water Tank

1 Place the Main Power to OFF.

2 Open the front door of analyzing unit.

3 As shown in the figure below, remove the connector on the water tank cap,

7 Service and Maintenance 7-21


loosen the cap, and then remove the water tank.

Warning:
Exercise caution. Excessive force may cause injury.

4 Wash the water tank for 2 to 3 times with fresh water, till the inner side is not
slippery or oily.

5 Install the water tank back. Turn on the analyzer to view if water tank works
normally.

7.5.2 Washing Dust Screens


1 Place the Main Power to OFF.
2 Open the front doors of the analyzer.
3 Remove the dust screens that are located below the reagent syringe and
sample syringe.

7-22 7 Service and Maintenance


Hold the screen with your hands and lift it upwards, then remove it
outwards.
4 Wash the screens with clean water and dry them by airing.
5 Install the dust screens correctly.
6 Close the front doors of the analyzer.

7.5.3 Replacing Reaction Cuvettes (Whole Disk)


To ensure the accuracy of the test, it is recommended to replace the reaction cuvettes
every month. After being used for a long period, carryover might happen because the
inner surface of the cuvettes may get scratched and the outer surface of the cuvettes
may get contaminated to cause inaccurate result.

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
Before replacing cuvette rotate the probes to a position convenient for
operation.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the damaged cuvette in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
degrade the system performance.

1 Place the Power to OFF

7 Service and Maintenance 7-23


2 Loosen the knurled screws in the back of wash unit. Remove the wash unit.

3 Manually rotate the probes and mixers to a position convenient for cuvette
replacement and then remove the reaction disk cover.

4 Loose four retaining screws on reaction disk with a hex wrench.

Unplug the heater of reaction disk.


5

Caution:
Exercise caution while unplugging, to avoid damaging wiring and
plug.

7-24 7 Service and Maintenance


6 Take out the reaction disk carefully with both hands.

7 Use tweezers or hand to remove cuvettes to be replaced. Clip under two edges
of cuvettes to take out the cuvettes. Press the cuvettes into the bottom of their
position on the disk until no further can be pushed downward.

Caution:
Use tweezers to remove the old cuvettes when they are too tight.
Do not touch the optical surfaces of the new cuvettes.
Press the bullets tight when installing cuvettes.
8 Install the bullets

CAUTION:
Check for cuvettes and bullets that are forgotten to be installed.

9 Install the reaction disk back in the sequence opposite to step 2 to 6..
10
After powering on, check the position of wash unit according to 7.4.7 Checking
and Maintaining Wash Unit.

7.6 Six-month Maintenance


7.6.1 Replacing Check Valves
As consumables, check valves should be replaced every 6 months.

1 Place the Power to OFF

7 Service and Maintenance 7-25


2 Remove right and rear plate. Refer to 4.1.3 Remove and Install Side Plate for
more information.
Locate the four check valves as shown in following figure.

3 Replace with new check valves and connect the tubing. If the end of the soft pipe
is deformed, cut off a small part of the pipe, and reconnect, so as to ensure
reliable connection.
4 Check if tubings are connected properly.
Pay attention to the direction of check valves when replacing. After replacing, two
check valves should guarantee the flow direction in the tubing as: D7→D8, D9→
D10, D3→D11, D4→D12. Refer to following figure for check valve flow direction:

5 Reinstall the right and rear plate.

7-26 7 Service and Maintenance


7.6.2 Replacing First and Second Phase Washing Tubing on
Wash Unit
Since first and second phase washing tubing always contacts the waste, they will turn
dirty or yellow after a period. Under this circumstances, replace the first and second
phase washing tubing. It is recommended to replace them every 6 months.

1 Place the Power to OFF.


2 Open the back cover. Disconnect the dirty tubing of the aspiration wash probe
(the longer straight probe). The No. for the first phase washing tubing is 12, and
11 for the second phase washing tubing. Pull the tubing out from the tubing fixer.
Take off the pipe marker for spare use.

3 Cut another pipe of the same length: first phase tubing is 650mm, and the second
is 600mm. Connect one end of the new tubing to the wash probe, and the other
passing through the tubing fixer to its respective adapter. (Be sure the old tubing
sign is added to the new tubing.)
4 Reinstall the back cover.
5 Perform startup initialization after replacing, to check the tubing for leakage.

7.6.3 Replacing DI Water Filter


After certain period of service, if you find the inlet water flow is not expedite, or DI
water filter changes color seriously, please replace the DI water filter according to
following steps:

1 Ensure the Power is placed to OFF.

2 Cut off the power supply of the water supply module.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-27


3 The DI water filter is placed outside the analyzer, and connected to DI
water tubing. Pull out the connecting pipes on both ends of the old filter
assembly to take out the old filter assembly.

You can unplug in this way: press down the releasing ring as indicated in
the picture with one hand, and pull out the connecting pipe with the other
hand.

NOTE:
Due to possible remaining pressure in inlet tubing, there may
be water spraying out when unplugging the connecting pipe.
Try to avoid water spraying onto the equipment. Wipe the
water off if this happens.

4 Install the connecting pipes onto both ends of new filter assembly
accordingly.

NOTE:
When installing the connecting pipe, make sure it touches the
bottom of the connector. Pull out the connecting pipe after
installing to check if it is installed properly.
Check direction before installing, with the arrow indicating
water flow direction pointing down.

5 Turn on the power of water supply module.

NOTE:
When ball valve is turned on, there may be water coming off
the air outlet tubing. Please place properly to avoid overflow.

6
Turn on the Power of analyzing unit. Check if water supply is normal.

7-28 7 Service and Maintenance


7.6.4 Replacing Wash Solution Filter

1 Make sure analyzing unit is not running tests.

2 Wear rubber gloves. Take out a soft pipe (inner diameter: 1/8”, length: 50mm)
from the supplies bag. Connect one end to new filter assembly, and the other to
disposable syringe. Inject water to the filter through the syringe till water comes
out of the filter. Take off the soft pipe and syringe. The purpose is to increase the
weight of filter assembly, so as to be placed at the bottom of wash solution
bucket.

3 Take the wash solution bottle cap out of the wash solution bucket. Remove the
old filter assembly from the bottle cap.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-29


4 Mount new filter assembly to the end of wash solution bottle soft pipe.
5 Put wash solution bottle cap assembly back into wash solution bucket.
6
Select System Prime in Utilities screen. Click Execute. Then select Prime
Wash Unit to ensure there are wash solution in Phase1 and 2 wash probes, and
remove air bubbles.

7.7 As-Needed Maintenance


7.7.1 Photometer Lens Maintenance
The lens of the photometer is contaminated or the maintenance time is above 1 year.

Materials required

lens cleaning paper, Cotton swabs and Ethanol

Note:
When moving the sample/reagent probe and mixer, do not bend or
collide with them
Do not leave the cotton tissue on the lens.

Removing/Reinstallation procedure

1 Place the analyzing unit power to the OFF position..

2 Loosen the nuts on the wash station, remove it and put in a clear box.

3 Remove the reaction carousel cover gently.

4 Loosen the screws of the reaction carousel and the cable of the slip ring .
Remove the reaction carousel.
Loosen the screws of the reaction carousel and the cable of the slip ring .
5
Remove the reaction carousel.

6 Install the reaction carousel and insert the cable of the slip ring. Tighten the
screws.
7 Cover the reaction carousel.

7-30 7 Service and Maintenance


8 Install back the wash station and tighten the screws
9 Turn on the analyzing unit
Alignment and confirmation

Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance-Cuvette Check.


If the dirty cuvettes are found, replace them.

7.7.2 Unclogging Sample Probe


When the sample probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the sample probe.

7.7.2.1 Removing Sample Probe

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk by pulling
upwards the handle.

3 Pull the probe arm to the highest point. Rotate the arm to move the sample
probe to a position above the sample compartment and convenient to
operate.

4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover with two hands and pull them slightly
outwards and then remove the cover upward from the arm base.
Hold the sample probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
5
connector with the other. Rotate the tubing connector counter-clockwise
until it disconnects from the sample probe. Remove the tubing from the
probe.
6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the probe’s circuit
connector from the board with the other hand.

CAUTION:
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit
board.

7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the sample


probe and take out the spring.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-31


8
WARNING:
Store the removed sample probe in a safe place where it will
neither endanger people working around the area nor be
damaged.

NOTE:
Exercise caution when pulling the sample probe away from
the arm so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage
the probe arm.

Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a
clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling
precision be affected.

NOTE:
The sample probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable
test results and should be replaced immediately according to 7.7.3
Replacing Sample Probe.

7.7.2.2 Unclogging Sample Probe

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Use a needle to unclog the sample probe from the tip.

CAUTION:
The sample probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable
test results and should be replaced immediately according to 7.7.3
Replacing Sample Probe.

7-32 7 Service and Maintenance


7.7.2.3 Installing Sample Probe

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Insert the sample probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the
hole on probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.

3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.

4 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release the probe to see if the spring can move
freely.
If so, proceed to the next step.
If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.

5 Connect the sample probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
Place a washer in the tubing connector, and then screw clockwise the
6
probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector.

CAUTION:
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.
7 Place the Power to ON.
8 Adjust the level sensing board: Fill the clean open container with DI water.
Put the tip of the reagent probe 2-3 mm under the water level. The
indicator D5 on the level sensing board will go through a process of
OFF-ON procedure. After the tip of the reagent probe is taken away from
the water, the indicator D5 will go off, which shows the function of the
board is normal. Proceed to the next step.
9 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm
base.
10 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
If so, proceed to the next step.
If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-33


11 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the
probe to a position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After installation, be sure to move the sample probe to a
position above its wash well.

12 Install the sample disk and cover the sample compartment.


13 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the sample probe automatically.

CAUTION:
The sample probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable
test results and should be replaced immediately according to 7.7.3
Replacing Sample Probe.

7.7.3 Unclogging Reagent Probe


When the reagent probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the reagent probe.

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

7.7.3.1 Removing Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk.

7-34 7 Service and Maintenance


3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point. Rotate the arm to move
the reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
convenient to operate.
4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover with two hands and pull them slightly
outwards and remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5 Hold the reagent probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other. Rotate the tubing connector counter-clockwise
until it disconnects from the reagent probe. Remove the tubing from the
probe.
6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the circuit connector
from the board with the other hand.

CAUTION:
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit
board.

7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the reagent


probe and take out the spring.
8
WARNING:
Store the removed reagent probe in a safe place where it will
neither endanger people working around the area nor be
damaged.

NOTE:
Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the arm
so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage the
probe arm.

Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a
clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling
precision be affected.

NOTE:
The reagent probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable
test results and should be replaced immediately according to
7.7.6Replacing Reagent Probe..

7 Service and Maintenance 7-35


7.7.3.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Use a needle to unclog the reagent probe from the tip.

CAUTION:
The reagent probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable
test results and should be replaced immediately according to
7.7.6Replacing Reagent Probe..

7.7.3.3 Installing Reagent Probe

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Insert the reagent probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the
hole on probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.

3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.
Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
4
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
If so, proceed to the next step.
If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.
5 Connect the reagent probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.

7-36 7 Service and Maintenance


6 Place a washer in the tubing connector, and then screw the probe’s fluid
connector back to the tubing connector.

CAUTION:
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.

7 Place the Power to ON.


8 Adjust the level sensing board: Fill the clean open container with DI water.
Put the tip of the reagent probe 2-3 mm under the water level. The indicator
D5 on the level sensing board will go through a process of OFF-ON
procedure. After the tip of the reagent probe is taken away from the water,
the indicator D5 will go off, which shows the function of the board is normal.
Proceed to the next step.
9 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm base.
10 Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
If yes, proceed to the next step.
If not, reinstall the arm cover and check the spring.
11 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the
reagent probe to a position above the wash well.

CAUTION:
After cleaning, be sure to move the reagent probe to a
position above its wash well.

12 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.


13 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the reagent probes automatically.

CAUTION:
The reagent probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable
test results and should be replaced immediately according to
7.7.6Replacing Reagent Probe..

7.7.4 Replacing Sample Probe


If the sample probe is bent or damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the
procedure given below to replace the damaged or bent probe.

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-37


BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
degrade the system performance.

1 Remove the bent or damaged sample probe as instructed by


7.7.2.1Removing Sample Probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Dispose of the bent or damaged sample probe in accordance
with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste
disposal.

2 Install a new sample probe as instructed by 7.7.2.3Installing Sample


Probe.

CAUTION:
After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to sample disk installation.

7.7.5 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe


When too much water exists in sample probe wash well and cannot be drained, the
wash well might have been clogged. You should follow this procedure to clean the
wash well.

WARNING:
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

1 Place the Power to OFF.


2 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
convenient to operate.
3 Add alkaline wash solution, javel water with 0.5% active chlorine, or 84
disinfectant (1ml) to the wash well and soak it for 10 minutes.
4 Place the Power back to ON.

7-38 7 Service and Maintenance


5 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
convenient to operate.
6 Execute “System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset
and rinse the sample probe and wash well automatically with deionized
water. Check if the sample probe wash well drains liquid normally.

7.7.6 Replacing Reagent Probe


If the reagent probe is bent or damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the
procedure given below to replace the damaged or bent probe.

WARNING:
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
degrade the system performance.

1 Remove the bent or damaged probe as instructed by 7.7.3.1 Removing


Reagent Probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Dispose of the bent or damaged reagent probe in accordance
with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste
disposal.

2 Install a new reagent probe as instructed by 7.7.3.3Installing Reagent


Probe .

CAUTION:
After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to reagent disk installation.

7.7.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers


If the mixer is damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the procedure given
below to replace the damaged mixer.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-39


WARNING:
The mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the mixer.
When replacing, pinch the mixer only by its knurled part. Protect the
flat part of the mixer from scratches.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the damaged mixer in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

CAUTION:
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Prepare a new mixer. Wash the flat part of the new mixer with wash
solution-dipped gauze or cotton swabs and then wipe it with DI
water-dipped gauze.

3 Gently pull the mixer to its highest point and rotate it to a position
convenient to operate.

4 CAUTION:
When trying to pull out the mixer, concentrate your force in
the direction of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased force may
damage the mixer and/or the axis.

Pinch the mixer by the knurled part with one hand and unscrew
(counter-clockwise) the retaining nut with the other hand until the mixer
gets loose. Pull the mixer downward to remove it and remove the nut.

7-40 7 Service and Maintenance


Align the new mixer to the bigger hole of the retaining nut and gently screw
5
it into the nut until the end of the mixer is in line with the smaller hole of the
nut.

6 Pinch the mixer by the knurled part and align the hole of the nut to the axis
on the mixer and push the nut onto the mixer until it reaches the end of the
mixer. Tighten the nut by screwing clockwise with the other hand.

CAUTION:
When trying to push the mixer into the arm, concentrate your
force in the direction of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased
force may damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Ensure the mixer is all the way pushed to the end.

7 After replacing the bar, visually check whether the mixer is vertical to the
bar arm.
If not, return to step 5 to remove the mixer and reinstall it.
If so, proceed to the next step.
8 Pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate it back to a position above
its wash well.

CAUTION:
After installing the mixer, be sure to rotate it to a position
above its wash well.

9
Place the Power back to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
System Reset on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset
automatically.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-41


7.7.8 Replacing Syringe Assembly
You should check the syringes every day and Recommended to replace the old
plunger assembly with a new one when,

 The old one has served for three months; or


 The old one has been used for over 100,000 tests; or
 The old one is apparently damaged.

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
degrade the system performance.
Exercise caution when installing the plunger assembly. Excessive
force may crack the syringe.
Always wear gloves while replacing the syringe plunger assembly.

Plunger assembly of sample syringe can be replaced in the same way as that of
reagent syringe. Perform the following steps to replace the reagent syringe plunger
assembly.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the sample syringe on the
right and reagent syringe on the left.

3 Prepare a new plunger assembly (shown in the figure below) and soak the
plunger tip in deionized water to eliminate bubbles.

4 Unscrew counter-clockwise the four upper retaining screws of the syringe,


then remove the screws and space bar.

7-42 7 Service and Maintenance


T-piece Solenoid
valve

Screw
Solenoid valve
support
Syringe V shaped
support

Space bar

Syringe drive
module

Drive part

Plunger screw Syringe support

5 Unscrew counter-clockwise the lower retaining screw of the syringe, then


remove the syringe from the holder.

6 CAUTION:
There may be residual water in the syringe connector. Do not
drop water onto the analyzing unit.

Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand and unscrew (counter-clockwise) the syringe. Exercise caution so that
the gasket on the syringe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a clean
place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been disassembled for
2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling precision be
affected.
7
CAUTION:
There may be residual water in the syringe. Do not drop
water onto the analyzing unit.
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution
when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.

Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the plunger guide cap and pinch the plunger
button to gently pull the plunger assembly from the syringe.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-43


8
CAUTION:
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution
when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.

Pinch the new plunger assembly by the plunger button and carefully insert
the plunger tip into the syringe and push it all the way to the end. Screw
clockwise the plunger guide cap until secure.
9 Immerse the syringe connector into deionized water. Pinch the plunger
button, pull it to aspirate half syringe of deionized water and then push it to
expel the deionized water and the air from the syringe.
10 Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand. Screw clockwise the syringe with the gasket into the T-piece until
secure.
11 Place the syringe on the holder.

CAUTION:
Operation should follow the steps and cautions strictly, otherwise
there may be installation problems leading to syringe damage or
early invalidation.

12 Install space bars and fix four upper retaining screws. Do not tighten the
screws now.
Adjust the height of syringe to keep the V-shaped groove level with sample
syringe scale11 (or reagent syringe 7.5). Then tighten the screws.
13 Rotate syringe assembly motor. When syringe plunger moves downward till
the plunger goes out of the syringe for 10~15mm, gently rotate the plunger
retaining screws to push the front end of plunger connector close to the drive
part.
Gently tighten the plunger retaining screw to avoid plunger rod beat.
14 Place the Power back to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds, and then execute
System Reset on the Daily Maint. page. Repeat the instruction for several
times if necessary, and check if the T-piece is leaking.
If not, go to the next step.
If yes, tighten the syringe. If leakage remains, replace the T-piece and
connector.
15
Close the front doors of the analyzer.

7-44 7 Service and Maintenance


7.7.9 Removing Air Bubbles
When you see air bubbles in the syringe, follow this procedure to remove them.

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the maintenance.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Unscrew the screws on the syringe cover and remove the cover. You can
see the reagent syringes on the left and sample syringe on the right.

3 Loosen the four upper retaining screws of the syringe, then remove the
screws and space bar.

4 Loosen the four lower retaining screws of the syringe and remove the
syringe from the holder.

5 Pull the plunger gently outwards until you cannot proceed any more, and
then push it quickly. Repeat this pull-push operation until the air bubbles
are removed from the syringe.

CAUTION:
Be sure not to push the plunger to the end tip; otherwise the
syringe may be damaged.

6 Place the syringe on the holder. Install space bars and fix retaining screws.

NOTE:
The upper edge of the upper space bar must reach the 7th
scale on the syringe.
When fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them
alternately with equilibrium force.

7 Screw (clockwise) the lower retaining screw until secure.

7.7.10 Replacing Lamp


The lamp of the photometric system ages after a certain period of service. An aged
lamp may introduce extra noise during the analyzing process. Replace the lamp
when its intensity is not strong enough, or the service time of the lamp has added up
to 2,000 hours.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-45


CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
decrease the system performance.
Do not touch either the light entrance of the lamp. In case the entrance
is dirty, clean it with ethanol-soaked absorbent cotton.

1 Enter the Daily Maint. page of the Utilities screen; then select
Cuvette/Lamp Check in the Maintenance area and click Execute. Select
Replace Lamp on the Lamp Check tab page. Make sure that the lamp has
cooled down for 5 minutes, and then select Next. If not, please wait until
the countdown is complete and then click Next.

WARNING:
After working for a while, the lamp and its base are usually hot
enough to burn you. Do not proceed with this procedure until
they have cooled down.

2 The light source assembly is at the right rear part of the instrument. Loosen
the screws on the back cover manually or using a screw driver. Pull the
cover upward to remove it.

Unscrew the compression nut on the terminal manually. Pull the power
3
cord out.

7-46 7 Service and Maintenance


Unscrew the retaining screws on the lamp base manually.
4

Pull the lamp out.


5

Install the new lamp in the reversed steps.


6
7
Click Finished after the lamp has been replaced.

Note:
Wait for 10 minutes until the lamp becomes stable before
starting other operations and then perform the Lamp Check
procedure.

7.7.11 Replacing Reaction Cuvette (Individual)


After the Cuvette/Lamp Check instruction is performed, if a cuvette is found to be
damaged, write down the cuvette number and follow this procedure to replace the
cuvette.

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
Before replacing cuvette rotate the probes to a position convenient for
operation.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-47


BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Dispose of the damaged cuvette in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

CAUTION:
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.

1 Place the Power to OFF

2 Manually rotate the probes and mixers to a position convenient for cuvette
replacement and then remove the reaction disk cover.

3 Make sure which cuvettes need replacing. Rotate reaction disk with hand to
place cuvettes needing replacing at positions convenient to be removed.

4 Use tweezers or hand to remove cuvettes to be replaced. Clip under two edges
of cuvettes to take out the cuvettes. Press the cuvettes into the bottom of their
position on the disk until no further can be pushed downward.

Caution:
Use tweezers to remove the old cuvettes when they are too tight.
Make sure to use tweezers to clip on both edges of the cuvette so
as not to crush the cuvette.
Do not touch the optical surfaces of the new cuvettes.
Press the bullets tight when installing cuvettes.

5 Place the Power to ON.

7-48 7 Service and Maintenance


6 Enter Daily Maint. page, and execute Cuvette/Lamp check. View the check
results and new cuvette status. If the new cuvette is still marked as dirty, check
the lamp and lens. Use anhydrous alcohol to clean the lens assembly. Replace
the lamp or fiber if necessary.

7.7.12 Cleaning Liquid Pump


If the liquid pump is clogged, it performance will be compromised. Clean the pump
diaphragm when needed.

BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the maintenance.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines
for biohazard waste disposal.

1 Place the Power to OFF. Remove right plate, and then the failed pump.

2 Preparation before disassemble the liquid pump:

CAUTION:
NF10 pump uses hexagon lobular socket pan head screws, which
should be removed with special hexagon offset ring screw driver.
See the figure below. NF30 pump uses cross batch.
Before disassemble the pump, it is better to make a sign on the
pump with a marker, so that the pump will not be misapplied when
installing back.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-49


3 The name for each part of the pump is shown in the figure below. Use tools
mentioned above to remove the four head screws.

4 Remove the head.

7-50 7 Service and Maintenance


5 Look for particles and clean the parts.
Usually, particles are adhered to following parts: valves (front and back),
connection plate, intermediate plate (front and back) and lip diaphragm. Mostly,
the particles are found in the contacting area between valves and connection
plate, so this should be a key point for checking and cleaning.

Check particles in parts mentioned above (especially the contacting area


between valves and connection plate). Whether visible particles are found or
not, make records and clean the following parts with fresh water: valves (front
and back), connection plate, intermediate plate (front and back), water inlet
and outlet. Lip diaphragm cannot be cleaned with fresh water, to prevent water
from entering the motor. Use clean cloth or paper to clean it.

CAUTION:
Lip diaphragm cannot be cleaned with fresh water, to prevent
water from entering the motor.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-51


6 Reinstall the liquid pump in following steps.
Install intermediate plate.
Note:
The azimuth of intermediate plate is shown in the figure (use the sign marked
earlier to locate the azimuth of intermediate plate). It must be installed
correctly; otherwise the pump cannot work normally.

Install valve.
Note:
Place the valve into the groove of intermediate plate. Keep the valve upright, or
it will degrade the sealing effect of check valve.
Install the connection plate, swing valve and head plate. Locate the azimuth of
each part with sign marked earlier. Pay attention to the inlet and outlet sign of
the pump (inlet on the right, and outlet on the left).
Use tools (NF10 pump uses hexagon offset ring screw driver T6, and NF30
pump uses cross batch) to tighten the four head screws.
Note:
(1) The screws must be tightened, or the pump cannot be sealed, and water
cannot be pumped.
(2) Apply force both rotationally and vertically when tightening the screws
(press the screw tightly with screw driver), so as to avoid screw sliding.
7 Checking
Experiment on serviced pump (The liquid pump may not be installed to the
support during experiment. As long as the electrical cables and fluidic tubings
are connected, control with the software. Execute System Reset for NF10
pump. Remove the wash unit for NF30 pump, and put the wash blocks into an
open container filled with fresh water, and then execute System Reset.). If
pump works normally, install the pump to the pump/valve support and connect
cables as well as tubings. Repeat the procedure of disassembling, cleaning,
and installing when:

1. Pump motor works, but no liquid enters into the tubing;


2. A great amount of air bubbles in pump outlet;
3. Insufficient water.
If the pump still fails after 3 times of repeating the procedure,
replace the pump assembly, and send the failed pump back to our
company for analysis.
8 Install the serviced pump back to the analyzer, and connect cables as well as
tubings.

7-52 7 Service and Maintenance


9 Install the right plate back.

7.7.13 Replacing Waste Tubing


If waste drainage is not smooth after a long time of service, replace the old tubing
with new one of given specification.

7.8 Maintaining ISE Module (Optional)


BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the maintenance.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

CAUTION:
Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables
may degrade system performance.

NOTE:
Generally after the replacement of any of the following components,
several ISE calibrations should be run before ISE Unit become stable.

7.8.1 Replacing Reagent Pack

1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Open the front doors of analyzing unit.

3 Remove and install a new reagent module.

4 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.

5 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list. Enter digit “25” in
the edit boxes next to Purge A and Purge B in Parameters area, then
select Execute to start the purge cycle.

6 Execute Purge A Cycle and Purge B Cycle and check whether the
initialization of the Reagent Pack is finished. If no error occurs during the
process, the Reagent Pack is replaced successfully.

7.8.2 Replacing Electrodes

WARNING:
Before performing the replacement, make sure the analyzer is
powered off.

7 Service and Maintenance 7-53


If you run no more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the
electrodes according to the following recommended schedule:

Na+ Electrode 6 months


K+ Electrode 6 months
Cl- Electrode 6 months
Reference Electrode 6 months

Na+ Electrode 10,000 samples


K+ Electrode 10,000 samples
Cl- Electrode 10,000 samples
Reference Electrode 10,000 samples

NOTE:
Because the electrodes must be installed sequentially, you
have to take out the electrode to be replaced and those (or
that) over it from above to below.

1 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.


2 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start maintaining the ISE
module.
3 Replace the electrodes.
4 Execute Purge A Cycle. If no error occurs during the process, it means the
electrode is replaced successfully.

7.8.3 Replacing Tubing


After a long time of service, replace with tubing of given specification if necessary.

7.8.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional)


BIOHAZARD:
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the maintenance.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

CAUTION:
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
The ISE unit (optional) should be on power all the time. In some cases
that the Power will be shut down for a long time more than half an hour,
the following steps should be performed.
Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables
may degrade system performance.

7-54 7 Service and Maintenance


1 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.
2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
3 Pull out the joint A and joint B of the wand tubing which has been inserted
into the adapters of the pump tubing. Hold them on for a few seconds until
the solution in the wand tubing flows back to Reagent Pack.

4 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list, and enter digit “25”
in the edit boxes to the right of Purge A and Purge B. Select Execute to
start the purge cycle based on the parameters you have entered.
5 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
6 Remove the electrodes.
7 Remove the Reagent Pack.
8 Put the reference, Na+, K+, Cl- and spacer electrodes into their individual
sealed bags.

NOTE:
The tube adapters on Reagent Pack should be covered by the red
caps. Store the Reagent Pack properly.

7.9 Quick-wear Parts


Replacing
Name Location Replacement
period/Condition

Sample probe As needed.


Sample probe Refer to 7.7.3
rotor Probe tip damaged or bent

Reagent probe As needed.


Reagent probe Refer to 7.7.5
rotor Probe tip damaged or bent
As needed.
Mixer Mixer rotor Probe tip damaged, bent or Refer to 7.7.6
erosion
On right and Recommended 3 months.
Sample/Reagent
left side after
syringe Or tested for 100,000 times. Refer to 7.7.7
opening front
assembly
door Or obvious damage
Reaction cuvette Inside reaction 1 month suggested for Refer to 7.7.10

7 Service and Maintenance 7-55


Replacing
Name Location Replacement
period/Condition
disk plastic cuvette.
Or reaction cuvette checked
and marked as damaged

Far right side Used over 1500 hours;


Lamp Refer to 7.7.9
of base board Or light intensity is too weak
Inside right
side board, Replace when it serves for 6
Check valve Refer to 7.6.1
connection months
point of fluidics
Aspiration tubing Auto wash Replace when it serves for 6
Refer to 7.6.2
of phase 1 and 2 tubing months
Outside of the Replace when it serves for 6
DI water filter Refer to 7.6.3
analyzer months
Inside diluted
Wash solution Replace when it serves for 6
wash solution Refer to 7.6.4
filter months
bucket
One on each
side of water As needed;
Water tank filter tank after Refer to 7.7.12
opening front blocked
door
As needed;
Fluidic
Waste tubing Waste drainage is not Refer to 7.7.12
connection
smooth

7-56 7 Service and Maintenance


8 Test and Maintenance
Software

8.1 Basic Operations


8.1.1 System Installation
Turn on the PC. The operating software will be run automatically after the computer is
turn on. Log in with service account. Choose Quick Mode (to skip startup
initialization).

Figure 8-1 Log in

Choose Emergency Exit to exit.

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-1


Figure 8-2 Shutdown

Run Setup.exe file under Setup. Select Next when following screen is shown.

Figure 8-3 Installation dialog box

As following figure pops up, select folder to install the software. Then select Next.

8-2 8 Test and Maintenance Software


Figure 8-4 Select folder

System will finish the installation process automatically. Select a default language
when Select Language dialog box pops up. Then select OK to complete the
installation.

Figure 8-5 Select language

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-3


8.1.2 Overview

8.1.2.1 Screen Layout


The main screen of the test and maintenance software consists of two parts.

Figure 8-6 Screen layout of BS-380/BS-390Test and Maintenance Software

The upper area provides various function buttons to test each unit.

The lower area displays the communication data associated with the main
unit/subunits. The lower-right area provides options and buttons to control the
communication frame.

8.1.2.2 Function Distribution


The basic operation commands of main unit/subunits are included in the tab of
corresponding unit, which also includes other functions like serial port setup, version
query, dark current test, sending instruction, etc.

8.1.2.3 Data Storage


The system saves under the startup directory all data of each unit produced since the
current startup. The data includes:

 CleanWaterTempData.txt: Save data of wash solution temperature after latest


run.

 ISE: Repeatedly overwrite and save all ISE information being sent and received.

 ReacTempData.txt: Save data of reaction disk temperature test after latest run.

 Disp.txt: Repeatedly overwrite and save all data frames that comply with the
communication protocol.

8-4 8 Test and Maintenance Software


8.1.3 Operating Commands

8.1.3.1 Main Unit


On the Main Unit screen includes the following commands:

 Shakehand: Select this command to shake hand with the main unit.

 Download Parameters: Download parameters to each unit.

 Enable modify parameters: Select this command to enable modifying the


parameters of all units.

 Disable modify parameter: Select this command to disable modifying the


parameters of all units.

NOTE:
Enable modify parameters and Disable modify parameter are
enabled only when main control board is not in parameter write-lock
status. Normally, the main control board is in parameter write-lock
status.

 Mechanical reset: Select this command to reset the mechanical parts of


subunits.

 System reset: Select this command to reset the subunits of the analyzer.

 Serial Port Setup: Set up serial port information. COM1-6 is supported.

 Unit Version: Select this command to view the versions of main unit and
subunits.

 Dark Current: Select this command to inquire the dark current at each
wavelength after the lamp is turned off.

 Send instruction: Enter an instruction and select this command to send it.

 System prime: Select this command to prime the water tank.

 Sleep: Select this command to make the main unit enter sleep status.

 Wake up: Select this command to wake up the main unit.

 Search Log: Select this command to view the event logs of the main unit.

8.1.3.2 Probe and Mixer Units


The probes and mixers can be debugged easily. This section introduces the
confusing commands of the two types of units.

Positions of the probes and mixers:

 To top of …: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the top of …

 To vertical home position: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to its
vertical home position.

 To ver. Limit of…: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to its lowest

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-5


vertical position.

 Into…: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the fixed position of …

 To liquid of …: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the liquid level
of … or to the lowest vertical position in case of no liquid.

 …for steps: Select this command to move the probe/mixer for configured steps,
which are related to the parameter configuration of the unit.

 Syringe empty: Select this command to move the syringe to the home position.

 Syringe reset: Select this command to move the syringe to the zero position and
then to the home position.

 Syringe full: Select this command to move the syringe to the obverse limit
position.

8.1.3.3 Reagent/Sample Disk Unit


Shakehand: Select this command to shake hand with the reagent/sample disk unit.
(This command is similar to that of other units.)

Reset reagent/sample disk: Select this command to reset the reagent/sample disk
unit. (This command is similar to that of other units.)

Rotate to given position: Select this command to rotate the reagent/sample disk at
specified speed for given circles and then stop it on specified position.

 Find zero position: Select this option to rotate the reagent/sample disk to the
zero position and then rotate it at specified speed for given circles and then stop
it on specified position.
 Rotate adversely: Select this option to rotate the reagent/sample disk
clockwise.
Rotate for given positions: This command is similar to “Rotate to given position”
except that the reagent/sample disk rotates for given positions and then stops.

8.1.3.4 Reaction Disk Unit


Rotate for given positions: Select this command to rotate the reaction disk
clockwise for given steps. The rotating distance is related to the parameter
configuration of the reaction disk unit.

Rotate and measure: Select this command to rotate the reaction disk at highest
speed for one circle and then stop it on position 2. During the rotating, photometric
measurement is performed.

Adjust lamp: Select this command to adjust the brightness level (0-255) of the lamp.

The two commands “Rotate to given position” and “Rotate for given positions”
are similar to that of the reagent disk unit.

8.1.3.5 Fluidic Unit


The Fluidic Unit tab provides commands that enable you to debug the wash unit,
control the valves and pumps, and inquire/view the current status of all fluidic tanks.

Note: To control the valves in batch, you must:

 Understand completely the relationship among all valves and their functions.

8-6 8 Test and Maintenance Software


 Ensure the probes and mixers influenced by current operation are stopped in
their wash wells.

NOTE:
Before turning on int. wash pump, please ensure that at least one of
sample or reagent int. wash valve is turned on. Otherwise there are
hazards of damaging these pump and valves, or tubing falling off under
pressure.

8.1.3.6 ISE Unit


This section introduces the screen operations of the ISE Unit tab. For test method of
the ISE unit, refer to ISE Test Techniques. The ISE Unit screen consists of four parts:
Step Instructions, Loop Command, Manual Instructions and Debugging. See
Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 ISE Unit tab

Step Instructions

Click any command in this area. The corresponding operation will be performed.

Manually Instruction

Multiple buttons in this area should be used during a complete test. The following
operation combinations are available:

 Select Pump calib.<PMCL>+Start<START> to test the pumps.


 Select Wash<CLEAN>+Start<START> to perform cleaning.
 Select Serum<SAMP>+Start<START> to perform serum test.
 Select Urine1<UWBW>+Urine2<UWBW>+Start<START> to perform urine test.
Loop Command

The commands in this area can be performed circularly. On the left is the circular
command control area and on the right is the instruction area.

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-7


NOTE:
Since the ISE module is external, a false result will be returned
immediately after an instruction is sent to it, and the true result will be
returned after a period. However, the software will start the next cycle
once receiving a result. Therefore, “Interval” should be set up carefully.

Debugging

The commands provided in this area are used to debug the ISE unit and can be
operated in the same way as the Step Instructions.

Figure 8-8 Debugging

8-8 8 Test and Maintenance Software


8.1.3.7 Bar Code Unit
Figure 8-9 Bar Code Unit

This section introduces the screen operations of the Bar Code tab.

Debugging bar code reader

1. Select a bar code type: Sample Bar Code or Reagent Bar Code.

2. Select Initialize to initialize the corresponding bar code reader.

3. Select Laser on or Laser off to align the bar code reader.

Scanning test

1. Select a scan mode, which includes Dynamic, Dynamic and Static, and Static.

2. Set up the start position, interval and cycles for scanning.

3. Select Scan to start scanning.

 During scanning, you can select Pause, Resume or Stop to control the
operation.
 Judge the scanning result.
 All instructions that are sent or received are displayed in the box on
right-hand side of the screen. You can save or clear the instructions if
needed.
Testing scanning stability

This operation is similar to the scanning test except that the options like scan mode
and start position must not be configured.

Sending instructions

Enter the original command and select Send Instruction to send it directly.

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-9


8.1.3.8 Reaction Disk Temperature
Figure 8-10 Reaction Disk Temp. screen

This chapter introduces the functions of the Reaction Disk Temp. screen.

Inquiring power of reaction disk heater and temperature of sensor

1. Set up the times of taking temperature and power readings and the interval
between two readings.

8-10 8 Test and Maintenance Software


2. Set up the Y-coordinate range for displaying temperature curve.

3. Select Start to start taking the temperature and power readings. During the
reading process,

 You can stop or pause the taking operation, and then save and load history
readings.
 You can adjust dynamically the Y-coordinate range of the temperature
curve.
 You can zoom in the curve display area as needed.
 The temperature data since the current startup are saved in the directory
where the test and maintenance software locates.
Checking sensor parameters and configuring the parameters

 Select a sensor in the Correction Data area.

 Enter the resistance corresponding to the temperature of each sensor.

 Select Calculate to calculate the parameters of the sensor and judgment


whether the sensor is qualified or not.

 Select Save to save the sensor parameters.

Inquiring, configuring and adjusting PID parameters

1. Select Current in the PID area to inquiring the PID parameters.

2. Select Save to save the edited PID parameters.

3. Select Self-adjust to notify the corresponding subunit to start adjusting the PID
parameters.

Testing heater control

Select Heater on or Heater off. If the command is not executed correctly, select it
again.

8.1.3.9 Wash Solution Temperature


The Wash Solution Temp. is similar to the Reaction Disk Temp. screen and can be
operated in the same way.

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-11


8.1.3.10 Photoelectric Unit
Figure 8-11 Photoelectric Unit screen

The Photoelectric Unit screen provides a function that enables you to perform the
following three tests for photometric measurement:

Measuring specified cuvette while the reaction disk is rotating

1. Select the check box next to Reaction disk rotates and deselect Measure 72
cuvettes.

2. Set up the cuvette position to measure, times and interval for collecting data.

3. Select Start. The AD values at each wavelength for the cuvette are displayed in
tabular and graphic forms.

Measuring specified cuvette in Stop status

1. Deselect the check boxes next to Reaction disk rotates and Measure 72
cuvettes.

2. Set up the cuvette position to measure, times and interval for collecting data.

3. Set up the rotating steps.

4. Select Start. The AD values at each wavelength for the cuvette are displayed in
tabular and graphic forms.

NOTE:
After executing this command, you must reset the photoelectric unit
mechanically.

Measuring all 72 cuvettes

1. Select the check box next to Measure 72 cuvettes.

2. Set up the cuvette position to measure, times and interval for collecting data.

8-12 8 Test and Maintenance Software


3. Select Start. All AD values at each wavelength for the 90 cuvettes are displayed
in tabular form.

8.2 Macro Instructions


8.2.1 Function
Each unit tab of the test and maintenance software only includes the basic
commands and procedures for ordinary alignment, which do not support more
complex or general test. However, the Macro Instruction tab allows you to create
necessary instructions or instruction set (macroinstruction).

8.2.2 Detailed Operations

8.2.2.1 Screen Layout


On the right side of the screen is the Macro Instruction area, in which you can
create and edit macro instructions and execute them circularly.

On the left side of the screen is the Instruction area, in which you can view the
detailed instructions of specified unit. See Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12 Macro Instruction screen

8.2.2.2 Setting up Macro Instruction Name


1. Select a debug type from the drop-down list box next to Type in the Macro
Instruction area.

2. Select New.

3. Enter the name of the new macro instruction in the popup dialog box, then select
OK. The name appears in the drop-down list box next to Name.

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-13


8.2.2.3 Adding Single Command
1. Select or create a macro instruction name.

2. Select a command.

3. Method: Select desired unit and instruction type in the Instruction area. All
qualified instructions of the unit are displayed in the lower table.

4. Entering instruction values.

5. Enter instruction value in the Value column according to other information in the
table. Note:

 The contents in the Instruction and Value columns should correspond to


each other. The Instruction column explains the value in the Value column.
 The Description column provides detailed explanation only to the first line
in the Instruction column. The Parameter1 column explains each instruction
of the selected type. You need not to enter the operating information and
parameter for some simple instructions.
 The last two lines of the Value column can be left blank.
 The Value column for the Reserved instructions can be left blank.
6. Verify the instructions.

After setting up an instruction that can be executed in current system


environment, you can verify if it can function correctly by clicking Send. If yes,
correct response and result frames will be displayed, and even data frame will
be uploaded for some instructions. If not, the information box at the bottom of
the screen will indicate the error in red.

7. Add a command to the macro instruction.

Select Add to Macro. The selected command is added to the macro instruction
list on the right-hand side of the screen. Repeat steps 1) through 5) to add more
commands.

8. Select Save below the macro instruction list to save the macro instruction. The
newly-created macro instruction is temporarily stored in the memory. If not
saved, the macro instruction will disappear when you switch to other one or exit
the system.

8.2.2.4 Modifying Macro Instruction


1. Select a macro instruction name.

Select an instruction type and a specific macro instruction in the Macro


Instruction area. All single commands of the instruction are displayed in the
lower list.

2. Select desired command that you want to modify.

Select a command. The table in middle of the screen shows the detailed
information of the command.

3. Modify the macro instruction.

Change the Value of each byte, or reselect a unit name and instruction type to
replace the instruction of the selected No. in the macro instruction list.

4. Save the macro instruction. Select Save to save the macro instruction to the
database.

8-14 8 Test and Maintenance Software


8.2.2.5 Run a Macro Instruction
If each single command of desired macro instruction can be executed circularly, you
can set the cycle times to a number greater than 1. You can also pause or stop the
executing process by selecting Pause or Stop.

8.2.2.6 Special Use


The Macro Instruction tab also provides a feature that enables certain byte of a
single command to be changed regularly during circular execution of the macro
instruction. Follow this procedure to define the type of a single command:

1) Select desired command that you want to define.

2) Enter the No. of the desired byte of the command in the Instruction Details
area.

3) Enter the delay time in the Delay field, which can be neglected if no delay is
needed before the command is executed.

4) Enter other parameters like low limit, high limit and step. In case the macro
instruction is cycled for many times, when the command is executed, the
corresponding byte of the selected No. will be increased according to the
defined low limit and step until the high limit, then the byte of the low limit (No.)
starts running again.

NOTE:
The delay information and byte control information can exist
simultaneously or by themselves.

8.3 Parameter
Select the Parameter from the main screen. The Parameter screen is displayed. You
can inquire and configure the parameters of the main unit and subunits. For the
probe/disk/mixer units you are allowed to set up the motor speeds. See the figure
below.

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-15


Figure 8-13 Parameter screen

8.3.1 Detailed Operations


Inquire
1. Select a target unit. To inquire parameters of a unit, select one from the
drop-down list box next to Unit. To inquire parameters of a motor, select one
from the drop-down list box next to Motion. Repeat step 1 for the following
operations.(Note: If you select both a unit and a motor, the system will identify
the lastly-selected one.)

2. Select Inquire.

Configure/Configure All
1. Inquire or read the parameters of selected unit/motor.

2. Modify the parameter value.

3. Select Config. To configure the parameter of the modified line, or select Config.
All to configure all parameters of the selected unit/motor.

Save
1. Inquire or read the parameters of selected unit/motor.

2. Select Save to save the parameters.

Read
1. Select a target unit.

2. Select Read, then select a parameter file in the popup dialog box. If you select a
parameter file of a unit other than the target one, the latter will be replaced by
the unit specified in the parameter file.

8-16 8 Test and Maintenance Software


Default
This button is similar to Save, except that when selecting Default you must not select
a target file, and the parameters will be saved in the directory where the test and
maintenance software locates.

Restore
This button is similar to Read, except that when selecting Restore you must not
select a target file, and the system will read the target file from the directory where the
test and maintenance software locates.

8.4 Application Cases


The test and maintenance software is service personnel-oriented software, suitable
for bottom layer operation on chemistry analyzer, which is convenient for test and
debugging during service. According to the introduction above, the test and
maintenance software is capable of direct operation on the analyzer, including unit
operation and macro instruction editing, as well as configuring analyzer parameters.

During service, the most basic application is the repeated operation of “running→
checking→ debugging→ running→ checking.” Take the debugging process after
replacing reagent disk drive assembly as example, to introduce the three steps of
“running”, “checking”, and “debugging”.

8.4.1 Running
After the reagent disk drive assembly is replaced, service personnel should adjust
reagent disk stop position. So it is necessary to perform following operations:

Execute Main Unit→ Mechanical reset for system reset;

Then execute Reagent Probe Unit→ To top of outer reagent disk to rotate reagent
probe to top of outer circle of reagent disk.

Refer to 8.1.3 for more details.

8.4.2 Checking
Check to see if reagent probe is leveled to center of reagent bottle in the direction of
reagent disk rotation. If not, determine whether reagent disk should continue to rotate
clockwise or counter-clockwise.

8.4.3 Debugging
Inquire reagent disk parameters in Parameter screen.

Adjust Cuvette position offset (Stop position) based on the checking result.
Increase the value means counter-clockwise adjustment of reagent disk stop position;
otherwise, clockwise adjustment.

Note: Generally, the analyzer parameters are adjusted to optimal status at release.
Therefore, the adjustment range for each time should not be too large.

Refer to 8.3 for more details.

8 Test and Maintenance Software 8-17


NOTE:
When the chemistry analyzer is released from factory, the parameters
have already been adjusted to optimal status. Therefore, please make
sure you are totally aware of the impact of current operation when
adjusting parameters.

Repeat the process introduced above, till it is adjusted to the position where reagent
probe is leveled with center of reagent bottle.

8-18 8 Test and Maintenance Software


9 Troubleshooting

This chapter provides the system warning messages and recommended corrective
actions, which should be taken in time once any error occurs.

When an error or failure occurs, relevant alarm message will be displayed, and the
system will take corresponding actions.

The alarm message will be displayed in the alarm message area of the software
screen, and then recorded in the system log automatically.

The logs will record the time, level, code and detailed information of each warning to
help user record and search errors.

In case of a warning message, check its error code on the Logs screen of the
operating software, and find recommended actions in the Solution field.

9 Troubleshooting 9-1
Figure 9-1 Warning Message Area

Warning Message Area

9.1 Classification of Error Messages


On the system, the error messages are divided into different types according to their
severity.

Severity: Warning

Level Description Actions taken by the system


0 Errors to warn user The system will warn the user of the errors like
calibration calculation failure. However, the
system running and test result will not be
affected.

Severity: Invalidating tests

Level Description Actions taken by the system


1 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate the current test, and
tests run it again if configured. If the error occurs for
consecutive 2 times on the same test, the
system will not rerun such test.
2 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests in current
reagent batch that use the exact reagent.
3 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests of the
sample sample.
15 Errors to invalidate an When failure (such as sample collision) occurs
instruction during measurement, the system will
invalidate all tests associated with the current

9-2 9 Troubleshooting
instruction and rerun the tests.

Severity: Pausing

Level Description Actions taken by the system


4 Errors to pause The system will stop the sampling of reagent
reagent probe for remaining tests and pause after finishing
the tests whose reagent has been dispensed.
5 Errors to pause sample The system will invalidate all in-progress tests
probe whose sample is not dispensed and forbid
new tests. When other tests whose sampling
is done are finished, the system will pause and
wait for servicing.
6 Errors to pause mixer The system will invalidate the tests whose
sample is not stirred and forbid new tests.
When the valid tests are finished, the system
will pause.
7 Errors to pause The system will stop dispensing reagent and
washing washing reaction cuvettes. When all valid tests
are finished, the system will pause.

Severity: Stopping analysis

Level Description Actions taken by the system


8 Errors to stop analysis The system will invalidate all unfinished tests
in emergency and pause.
9 Errors to forbid test When test conditions are not met at system
startup, analysis will be forbidden.

Severity: Forbidding

Level Description Actions taken by the system


10 Errors to forbid LIS The system will invalidate sending results to
and downloading sample from the LIS host
and should be connected to LIS again.
11 Errors to forbid ISE When the ISE module is configured but cannot
work normally, the system will forbid running
ISE analytes.
12 Errors to forbid sample When the sample bar code reader is
bar code reader configured but cannot work normally, the
system will forbid scanning samples.
13 Errors to forbid reagent When the reagent bar code reader is
bar code reader configured but cannot work normally, the
system will forbid scanning reagents.
14 Errors to forbid fluidic The system will prohibit the washing function.
system

9 Troubleshooting 9-3
Severity: Shutting down

Level Description Actions taken by the system


16 Errors to exit When startup check is not passed, the system
will remind user of exiting the operating
software.

9.2 Corrective Actions


When an error occurs, check the error code on the Logs page of the Utilities screen
and then find corresponding measures in the following tables.

WARNING:
When troubleshooting the analyzer, first find out whether it is necessary
to switch off the Main Power or Analyzing Unit Power.

BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.

9.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit

9.2.1.1 Operating System


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0001 16 Reinstall Windows
Operating Operating system is not XP or Windows Vista
system error Windows XP/Vista and the operating
software
C0002 16 Install a memory
Insufficient Memory is less than
above 512M and
memory 512M
reboot
C0003 16 Resolution Screen resolution is not Set resolution to
error 1024*768 1024*768
C0004 16 Set color to 65535
Color error Color is below 16 bits
and reboot
C0005 0 Rearrange hard disk.
Insufficient Remaining disk space is
Delete curves and
disk space less than 1G
other unuseful files
C0006 16 Rearrange hard disk.
Out of disk Remaining disk space is
Delete curves and
space less than 200M
other unuseful files
C0007 16 CPU
CPU is below Celeron
performance Replace PC or CPU
733
low

9-4 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0008 0 Check printer
Printer is not powered connection. Check if
Printer
on. Cable is not printer is powered
cannot be
connected. No driver is on, driver and default
connected
installed printer has been
installed
C0009 0 Check for paper jam.
Printer Paper jam. No paper. Check if printer is
failure No ink busy, and print tasks
are too many
C0010 0 Help No help document. Help Check if help
document document is damaged. document exists or is
error No memory space damaged
C0011 0 No sound card is
Sound card installed. Sound card Reinstall sound card
failure failure. Incorrect sound or sound card driver
card driver

9.2.1.2 Equipment Connection


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0101 9 Check serial port
connection. Replug
Serial cable is not cable. Check if
Equipment
connected. Analyzing analyzing unit is
cannot be
Unit Switch is powered on. Start
connected
powered off initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
C0102 9 Check serial port
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Sending buffer is full.
analyzing unit is
cannot send Serial port is not
powered on. Start
instruction initialized
initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
C0103 9 Check serial port
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Receiving buffer is
analyzing unit is
cannot full. Serial port is not
powered on. Start
receive data initialized
initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit

9 Troubleshooting 9-5
9.2.1.3 Calculation
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0301 0 (%s test) Reagent blank
Replace reagent.
Calibration absorbance is too
Replace calibrator.
sensitivity high. Calibrator is
Recalibrate
error degenerated
C0302 0 (%s test)
Coefficient Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
difference wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
limit is out of wrong Recalibrate
range
C0303 0 (%s test)
Multi-point or
non-linear
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
calibration
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
correlation
wrong Recalibrate
coefficient
(R2) is out of
range
C0304 0 (%s test)
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
Reaction
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
curve SD is
wrong Recalibrate
out of range
C0305 0 (%s test) Results cannot be
Replace reagent.
Calibration calculated by
Replace calibrator.
parameters specified rule. Results
Recalibrate or
cannot be are abnormal.
recalculate calibration
calculated by Calibration is not
parameters
given method convergent
C0306 0 (%s test) Reagent blank
Replace reagent.
Absorbance absorbance is too
Replace calibrator.
of 0 calibrator high. Calibrator is
Recalibrate
is out of range degenerated
C0307 0 (%s test)
Calibration replicates
Calibration
are unfinished.
data is Fill reagent and
Reagent is
incomplete. calibrator. Recalibrate
insufficient. Calibrator
Cannot
is insufficient
calculate
C0308 0 (%s test
and %d Key points are lost
sample)Resp during response Rerun
onse calculate calculation
error
C0309 0 (%s test Abnormal sample
and %d (hemolysis, etc.).
Run diluted sample, or
sample)Resp Calibrator
recalibrate
onse is out of concentration is too
range low
C0310 0 If problem occurs
Communication
Received data frequently, reconnect
between analyzing
check sum serial cable. If problem
unit and operation
error remains, contact the
unit is interfered
developer

9-6 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0311 0 Control is
(%s test) degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
Real-time QC Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
12s warning Light intensity is Replace light source
abnormal
C0312 0 Control is
(%s test)
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
Real-time QC
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
of 13s is out
Light intensity is Replace light source
of control
abnormal
C0313 0 Control is
(%s test)
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
Real-time QC
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
of 22s is out
Light intensity is Replace light source
of control
abnormal
C0314 0 Control is
(%s test)
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
Real-time QC
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
R4s is out of
Light intensity is Replace light source
control
abnormal
C0315 0 Control is
(%s test)
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
Real-time QC
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
41s is out of
Light intensity is Replace light source
control
abnormal
C0316 0 Control is
(%s test)
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
Real-time QC
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
10x is out of
Light intensity is Replace light source
control
abnormal
C0317 0 (%s test)
Calibrator goes
Calibration Replace reagent or
wrong. Reagent goes
repeatability is calibrator. Recalibrate
wrong
out of range
C0318 0 (%s test)
Incorrect reagent
Multi-point or
dispensing volume. Retest un-monotone
nonlinear
Incorrect calibrator points. Recalibrate
calibration is
dispensing volume.
not monotone
C0319 0 (%s)Result Abnormal test result. Rerun participated
cannot be Error occurs like 0 tests. Check and reset
calculated dividend calculation formula
C0320 0 (%d sample
/%s test) Response error.
Concentration Calibration formula Rerun or recalculate
cannot be error
calculated
C0321 0 Rerun, or rerun after
Absorbance is Sample goes wrong.
replacing reagent or
out of range Reagent goes wrong
sample
C0322 0 (%s test
Antigen excess. Too
and %d
much sample.
sample) Dilute and rerun
Sample concentration
Prozone
is too high.
check error

9 Troubleshooting 9-7
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0323 0 (%s test
and %d
Reagent is stored too Rerun after replacing
sample)R1
long or expired reagent
blank exceeds
limit
C0324 0 (%s test
and %d
sample)No
Rerun, or rerun after
linear interval Unsteady reagent.
replacing reagent or
in Kinetic Sample goes wrong
sample
analysis.
Cannot
calculate
C0325 0 (%s test
and %d Out of sample or Check the
sample) has system has been in corresponding reaction
not performed Sample Stop status. curve of the test for
second time Cannot add more antigen excess. If it
sample sample occurs, rerun the test.
dispensing
C0328 0 enzyme linear
No calculation Rerun the test with
extension failed, no
interval diluted sample.
calculation interval

9.2.1.4 Sample Bar Code


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0401 0 Released sample is Check sample tube for
Sample
not unloaded. barcode mis-applying.
barcode %s
Barcode label is in Reprint and reapply
already exists
wrong place barcode label
C0402 0 Barcode %s
Sample information Re-download or
has no
does not exist on LIS manually input request
corresponding
or is not downloaded information
request
C0403 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
C0404 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
C0405 0 sample
barcode is Check sample tube to
Barcode already
same in see if barcode is used
exists on current
position %s repeatedly. Reprint and
sample disk
and rescan
position %s.

9-8 9 Troubleshooting
9.2.1.5 Reagent Bar Code
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0501 0 Deleted reagent is
Check reagent bottle
not unloaded.
Reagent for barcode
Barcode label is in
barcode %s mis-applying. Reprint
wrong place.
already exists and reapply barcode
Reagent is used
label
repeatedly
C0502 0 Barcode %s
Reagent barcode is
includes Rescan this reagent
printed in wrong
invalid barcode, or reprint and
format. Barcode scan
reagent rescan as configured
error
information
C0503 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
C0504 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
C0505 0 %s reagent
Check reagent bottle to
barcode has Barcode already
see if barcode is used
two exists on current
repeatedly. Reprint and
corresponding reagent disk
rescan
positions

9.2.1.6 LIS Communication


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0601 13 Check LIS connection
LIS host Abnormal network
and network cable. Check
cannot be connection. LIS does
if LIS host and LIS station
connected not start
can start normally
C0602 0 If problem occurs
Incorrect
accidentally, send or
segment
Communication receive again. If problem
sequence.
failure occurs frequently, consult
Required
developer of LIS or
segment lost
equipment
C0603 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Required Communication receive again. If problem
field lost failure occurs frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0604 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Data type Communication receive again. If problem
error failure occurs frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment

9 Troubleshooting 9-9
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0605 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Field value is Communication receive again. If problem
not found failure occurs frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0606 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Wrong
Communication receive again. If problem
message
failure occurs frequently, consult
type
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0607 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Wrong event Communication receive again. If problem
No. failure occurs frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0608 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Wrong Communication receive again. If problem
process ID failure occurs frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0609 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Wrong Communication receive again. If problem
version No. failure occurs frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0610 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Unknown
Communication receive again. If problem
keyword
failure occurs frequently, consult
identity
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0611 0 If problem occurs
Keyword accidentally, send or
identity Communication receive again. If problem
already failure occurs frequently, consult
exists developer of LIS or
equipment
C0612 0 If problem occurs
accidentally, send or
Unknown Communication receive again. If problem
error failure occurs frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0613 0 Neglect. If problem occurs
Your query
frequently, contact
does not LIS failure
developer of LIS or
exist on LIS
equipment
C0614 13 Send and receive again
LIS host is
after a moment, or
busy. Cannot LIS failure
reconnect to LIS. Reset
respond
LIS

9-10 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0615 0 Check network
LIS does not start. connection. If problem
LIS response
Communication occurs continuously for 3
is timed out
failure times, contact developer
of LIS or equipment
C0616 0 Check if LIS host works
normally. Reset LIS host.
Application If problem occurs
LIS host database
record continuously for 3 times,
error
locked contact the LIS
manufacture or
equipment developer
C0617 0 LIS host Send and receive after a
does not LIS host failure while. Reconnect LIS
respond host. Reset LIS host
C0618 0 Wrong Test configuration Check again. Set
barcode error in LIS host and corresponding tests
information operating software. relationship between
downloaded Tests missing or extra operating software and
from LIS tests in LIS host LIS host
C0619 0 %s already
exists.
Delete the sample with
Please The same sample is
the same ID on the
change the sent repeatedly from
analyzer, or send only
sample ID the LIS server.
once.
and try
again.
C0620 0 Neglect the error. If the
No matches
No matches on the error occurs frequently,
on the LIS
LIS server. contact the manufacturer
server!
of LIS or the analyzer.
C0621 0 Search
If problem occurs
conditions
accidentally, send or
error. The
Search conditions receive again. If problem
LIS server
error. occurs frequently, consult
cannot
developer of LIS or
search for
equipment
the samples.
C0622 0 A sample(s)
A sample(s) without
without bar Add bar code information
bar code and ID is
code is to the sample and retry.
sent from the LIS host
received
C0623 0 No sample ID or invalid
sample ID.In the event of
A sample(s)
The sample ID sent invalid sample ID, please
with invalid
from the LIS host is consult the manufacturer.
ID is
invalid Please change the ID
received
before sending the
sample
C0624 0 A sample(s)
A sample(s) without Please enter the bar code
without bar
bar code and ID is and ID before sending the
code and ID
sent from the LIS host sample
is received

9 Troubleshooting 9-11
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0625 0 Bar code %s
already has a
A sample with the Before sending the
correspondin
same bar code sample, please delete the
g sample
already exists, and sample with the same ID,
ID.Using the
has an ID different or change the sample ID
sample ID
from the one on LIS on LIS
from LIS is
not permitted
C0626 0 A LIS The message sent
message in from the LIS host is
Consult the manufacturer
incorrect not in the correct
of LIS or of the analyzer.
format is format specified by
received. the protocol.
C0627 0 Part of the Part of the message
message in sent from the LIS host
Consult the manufacturer
incorrect is in incorrect format,
of LIS or of the analyzer.
format is but is tolerated by the
bypassed. operating software.

9.2.1.7 Others
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0701 2 All reagents in this
kind of bottles do not
Fill reagent of this test,
%s test has reach minimum limit.
or replace it with new
no enough %s All reagents of this
reagent
kind cannot be
detected
C0702 8 Check if equipment is
Analyzing unit is busy
Test period powered on. Restore
and cannot return
timed out. failure. Communicate
result, serial
Cannot with control software.
communication error,
continue Restart analyzing unit
or power failure
and operation unit
C0703 9 Retest dark current on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Dark current Excessive circuit
page. Adjust
is too high noise
photoelectric gain.
Contact your developer
C0704 9 Reset the main unit on
Analyzing unit Parameter
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
reset failed downloading failed
page
C0705 8 Restore failure on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Analyzing unit
Sensor failure. page. Restart analyzing
failure cannot
Motor/Belt failure unit and operation unit.
recover
Contact equipment
developer
C0706 0 No floppy disk or U
Storage disk is inserted. Check if U disk or
device error. Insufficient disk floppy disk is inserted or
Cannot export space. Floppy disk or full. Check if storage
data U disk is locked or device is damaged
damaged

9-12 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0707 0 No floppy disk or U
disk is inserted. File
Storage Check if U disk or
does not exist. File
device error. floppy disk is inserted or
error. File is
Cannot import full. Check if storage
damaged. Floppy
data device is damaged
disk or U disk is
locked or damaged
C0709 0 Insufficient
Insufficient wash Add alkaline wash
wash solution
solution on reagent solution on specified
on reagent
disk position of reagent disk
disk
C0710 2 Insufficient
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on reagent water on reagent disk
reagent disk
disk
C0711 0 Insufficient
Insufficient acid wash Add acid wash solution
acid wash
solution on sample on specified position of
solution on
disk sample disk
sample disk
C0712 0 Insufficient
Insufficient alkaline Add alkaline wash
alkaline wash
wash solution on solution on specified
solution on
sample disk position of sample disk
sample disk
C0713 3 Insufficient
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on sample water on sample disk
sample disk
disk
C0714 9 Check if lamp is turned
on, and check the
Lamp aged (service
cuvettes on
time over 2,000
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Light intensity hours). Lamp is not
Page. If failure remains,
is weak turned on. Lamp is
replace the lamp. If
loose. All cuvettes are
failure still remains,
dirty
contact equipment
developer
C0715 0 Perform cuvette blank
again. If blank limit is
Cuvette is dirty. The
exceeded for 10 times,
amount of water to
Blank of replace the cuvette. If
measure the sixth
cuvette %s problem happens to all
phase water blank is
exceeds limit cuvettes, replace the
not enough. Light
lamp. If problem still
intensity is too weak
remains, contact
equipment developer
C0716 8 Received data is too
Received data Contact equipment
much and exceeds
overflow developer
buffer capacity

C0717 8 Sent data Instruction sending Contact equipment


overflow buffer is full developer

9 Troubleshooting 9-13
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0718 11 Calibrate the ISE
ISE test results are module when the
not received in given system is paused or
ISE test is
time; ISE module is idle. If problem occurs
timed out
not connected continuously for 3 times
correctly or other error occurs,
contact the developer
C0719 9 Check if lamp is
installed correctly and
Lamp is not turned
turned on. If failure
on; bulb is damaged;
remains after replacing
no lamp is installed;
Lamp is not the lamp, contact the
lamp is loose; foreign
turned on developer. Check if
matter exist in three
foreign matters exist in
continuous cuvettes
continuous three
to obstruct light path
cuvettes. Replace the
cuvettes if necessary
C0720 9 No cuvettes are Check if all positions of
No reaction installed in four reaction disk are
cuvettes, or continuous positions; occupied. If yes, ask
lamp intensity photoelectric gain our service personnel to
is too strong exceeds the adjust the photoelectric
measurement range gain
C0721 1 Check for failed cuvette
and replace it. If the
Foreign matters exist
Clots are error remains, check if
to obstruct light path
found in the lamp is installed
so that the measured
No.%s tightly. If the error still
value is less than
cuvette remains for all new
1000
cuvettes, contact our
service personnel
C0722 11 Reagent pack Reagent pack had
Replace the reagent
is expired been expired before
pack with a new one
when installed being installed
C0723 11 Reagent pack Reagent pack is
Replace the reagent
is expired expired during
pack with a new one
when used application
C0724 11 Reagent is Replace the reagent
Reagent ran out
exhausted pack with a new one

9.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit

9.2.2.1 Main Unit


Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0001 8 Restore failure on
Instruction format
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Invalid error. Invalid
page. If this message
command information is
appears for 3 times,
included
contact the developer

9-14 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0002 9 Parameter Reset mechanically
Parameter downloading failed. and retry. If this failure
download error Parameter occurs for 3 times,
configuration error contact the developer
A0003 8 Wait for 30-60s and
Downloading retry. If system does
Main unit is
parameters to not respond for long
busy
subunits. Cannot time, restore failure. If
downloading
respond to other this problem occurs
parameters
instruction frequently, contact the
developer
A0004 9 Restore failure on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Self-test error Self-test error page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0005 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
Invalid
Instruction execute failure on
instruction in
error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
current status
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0006 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
System is busy. Executing other on again. Restore
Cannot instruction. Cannot failure on
respond to respond to current Utilities-->Daily Maint.
other operation one page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0007 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
Instruction Instruction execute failure on
execute error error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0008 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
E2PROM read/write failure on
Memory error
error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0009 0 Received data in Rerun. If problem
Photoelectric
single period is less occurs frequently,
data is lost
than 90 contact the developer

9 Troubleshooting 9-15
Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0010 8 If optic measurement
assembly goes wrong,
replace AD assembly.
If AD collection board
Photoelectric AD value is too low works normally,
output is (below 1000) or too remove optic
abnormal high (over 65500) measurement
assembly, and check if
preamplification board
and optical path are
normal
A0011 8 Photoelectric data
Photoelectric Restart analyzing unit
buffer is full. Cannot
data overflow and operation unit
process new data
A0012 8 Photoelectric circuit
Photoelectric
does not return result Restart analyzing unit
collection is
via FIFO in specified and operation unit
timed out
time
A0013 8
Restart analyzing unit
Downloading Incompatible or and replace with new
failed wrong version version. If failed again,
contact the developer

A0014 8 Connection error. Restart analyzing unit


Handshake Analyzing unit is and shake hand. If
failed performing other failed for 3 times,
operation contact the developer

A0015 8 Switch off analyzing


unit power and switch
Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
given time page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0016 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
No response,
Instruction execute failure on
or response
error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0017 0 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
Communication Instruction failure on
frame error communication error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer

9-16 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0018 0 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
Instruction failure on
Serial port error
communication error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer

9.2.2.2 Sample Probe Unit


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0101 5 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0102 8 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0103 5 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
again. Download
Unit is busy. Unit parameters and restore
No execute
does not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0104 5 Wrong Switch off analyzing unit
sensor power and switch on
status when again. Restore failure
sample Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves message appears for 3
vertically(oth times, contact the
er position) developer
A0105 8 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
again. Restore failure
sample
Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
message appears for 3
vertically(in
times, contact the
reaction
developer
disk)

9 Troubleshooting 9-17
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0106 5 Sample
probe
cannot find
Vertical position
home Restore failure. If failed
sensor failure.
position for 3 times, contact the
Obstruction exists in
when developer
vertical direction
moving
vertically(oth
er position)
A0107 8 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0108 15 Sample
probe
bumps when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
moving restore failure. Remove
Obstruction exists
vertically obstruction and reset
(other
position)
A0109 15 Sample
probe
If auto reset fails,
bumps when Wrong position.
restore failure. Remove
moving Obstruction exists
obstruction and reset
vertically(IS
E unit)
A0110 15 Sample
probe
bumps when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
moving restore failure. Remove
Obstruction exists
vertically(in obstruction and reset
reaction
disk)
A0111 5 Lowering
down at Sample probe is not
If auto reset fails,
current in vertical home
restore failure. If failed
position is position. Current
for 3 times, contact the
not allowed position is not proper
developer
(other for lowering down
position)
A0112 8 Lowering
down at
Sample probe is not
current If auto reset fails,
in vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
position is not proper
allowed(in developer
for lowering down
reaction
disk)

9-18 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0113 5 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
again. Restore failure
sample
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
message appears for 3
horizontally
times, contact the
(other
developer
position)
A0114 11 Wrong Switch off analyzing unit
sensor power and switch on
status when again. Restore failure
sample Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves message appears for 3
horizontally times, contact the
(ISE unit) developer
A0115 8 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
again. Restore failure
sample
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
message appears for 3
horizontally
times, contact the
(in reaction
developer
disk)
A0116 5 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally
(other
position)
A0117 8 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally
(in reaction
disk)
A0118 15 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
If auto reset fails,
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally horizontally.
(other
position)

9 Troubleshooting 9-19
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0119 8 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
If auto reset fails,
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally horizontally.
(in reaction
disk)
A0120 5 Rotating at Sample probe is not
current in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
height is not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
(other for rotation(highest developer
position) position)
A0121 8 Rotating at Sample probe is not
current in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
height is not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(in height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
reaction for rotation(highest developer
disk) position)
A0122 5 If auto reset fails,
Syringe
restore failure. If failed
sensor is in Syringe sensor error
for 3 times, contact the
wrong status
developer
A0123 5 Check if sample syringe
reaches maximum limit
Sample syringe
Syringe and cannot restore.
reaches maximum
cannot find Restore failure, or reset
stroke. Cannot
home after pushing syringe to
restore or dispense
position home position. If failed
sample
for 3 times, contact the
developer
A0125 8 Sample
probe does
not detect
No deionized water Add deionized water
wash
solution
level
A0126 1 Sample
probe does
not detect No R1 dispensed. Check if reagent is
liquid level Insufficient R1 sufficient. Rerun
on reaction
disk
A0127 3 Sample
probe does
No sample tube.
not detect Check if sample is
Sample is already
liquid level sufficient. Rerun
depleted
on sample
disk
A0128 1 Insufficient
sample Insufficient sample Check sample volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0129 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
aspirates full for 3 times, contact the
aspirates
abnormally developer
too much

9-20 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0130 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
dispenses empty for 3 times, contact the
dispenses
abnormally developer
too much
A0131 1 Sample
Add samples or replace
probe does Insufficient sample.
with standard sample
not aspirate Wrong tube type
tube
sample
A0133 11 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
Execution again. Restore failure
result is not Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
received in is timed out Maint. page. If this
given time message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0134 8 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
No again. Restore failure
response, or Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
response error Maint. page. If this
error message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer

9.2.2.3 Sample Disk Unit


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0201 5 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0202 8 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0203 5 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer

9 Troubleshooting 9-21
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0204 5 Restore failure on
Home Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Cannot find home
position is not page. If this message
position
found appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0205 5 Restore failure on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Step missed Belt failure page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0206 5 Restore failure on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Wrong sensor
Sensor failure page. If this message
status
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0207 12 Sample barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0208 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
A0209 12 Rescan after restoring
Bar code
Scanning too many or failure. If this message
sending
too fast appears for 3 times,
buffer is full
contact the developer
A0210 11 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
given time page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0211 11 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Restore
No response,
Instruction execute failure on
or response
error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer

9-22 9 Troubleshooting
9.2.2.4 Reagent Probe Unit
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0401 4 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0402 8 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0403 4 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0404 4 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
again. Restore failure
reagent
Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
message appears for 3
vertically
times, contact the
(other
developer
position)
A0405 8 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
again. Restore failure
reagent
Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
message appears for 3
vertically (in
times, contact the
reaction
developer
disk)
A0406 4 Reagent
probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically
(other
position

9 Troubleshooting 9-23
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0407 8 Reagent
probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0408 15 Reagent
probe
bumps
If auto reset fails,
when Wrong position.
restore failure. Remove
moving Obstruction exists
obstruction and reset
vertically
(other
position)
A0409 15 Reagent
probe
bumps
If auto reset fails,
when Wrong position.
restore failure. Remove
moving Obstruction exists
obstruction and reset
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0410 4 Lowering
down at Reagent probe is not
If auto reset fails,
current in vertical home
restore failure. If failed
position is position. Current
for 3 times, contact the
not position is not proper
developer
allowed(oth for lowering down
er position)
A0411 8 Lowering
down at
Reagent probe is not
current If auto reset fails,
in vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
position is not proper
allowed(in developer
for lowering down
reaction
disk)
A0412 4 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
again. Restore failure
reagent
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
message appears for 3
horizontally
times, contact the
(other
developer
position)

9-24 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0413 8 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
again. Restore failure
reagent
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
message appears for 3
horizontally
times, contact the
(in reaction
developer
disk)
A0414 4 Reagent
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally
(other
position)
A0415 11 Reagent
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally(
in reaction
disk)
A0416 15 Reagent
probe
collides Reagent probe is
If auto reset fails,
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally horizontally
(other
position)
A0417 8 Reagent
probe
collides Reagent probe is
If auto reset fails,
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally( horizontally
in reaction
disk)
A0418 4 Reagent probe is not
Rotating is in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
not allowed position. Current restore failure. If failed
(other height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
position) for rotation(highest developer
position)
A0419 8 Reagent probe is not
Rotating is
in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
not
position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(in
height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
reaction
for rotation(highest developer
disk)
position)

9 Troubleshooting 9-25
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0420 4 Syringe If auto reset fails,
sensor is in restore failure. If failed
Syringe sensor error
wrong for 3 times, contact the
status developer
A0421 4 Check if reagent syringe
reaches maximum limit
Reagent syringe and cannot restore.
Syringe
reaches maximum Restore failure, or reset
cannot find
stroke. Cannot after pushing syringe to
home
restore or dispense home position. If this
position
reagent problem occurs for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0422 8 Reagent
probe does
not detect
No deionized water Add deionized water
wash
solution
level
A0423 1 Reagent
No R1 or sample or
probe does
insufficient R1 in
not detect Check if reagent is
reaction cuvette when
liquid level sufficient. Rerun
system dispenses
on reaction
R2.
disk
A0424 2 Reagent
probe does
No reagent on R2
not detect Check if reagent is
position. Reagent is
liquid level sufficient. Rerun
depleted
on reagent
disk
A0425 1 Insufficient
reagent Insufficient reagent Check reagent volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0426 1 Reagent
Reagent syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
aspirates full for 3 times, contact the
aspirates
abnormally developer
too much
A0427 1 Reagent
Reagent syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
dispenses empty for 3 times, contact the
dispenses
abnormally developer
too much
A0428 8 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
Execution again. Restore failure
result is not Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
received in is timed out Maint. page. If this
given time message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer

9-26 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0429 8 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
No again. Restore failure
response, Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
or response error Maint. page. If this
error message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0430 2 No reagent is loaded
%s test has Check if the reagent is
where the reagent
no enough sufficient, and then try
probe is lowering to,
reagent %s again.
or reagent is used up.

9.2.2.5 Reagent Disk Unit


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0501 4 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0502 8 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0503 4 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0504 4 Restore failure. If this
Home
Cannot find home message appears for 3
position is
position times, contact the
not found
developer
A0505 4 Restore failure. If this
Step message appears for 3
Belt failure
missing times, contact the
developer
A0506 4 Restore failure. If this
Wrong
message appears for 3
sensor Sensor failure
times, contact the
status
developer

9 Troubleshooting 9-27
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0507 13 Reagent barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0508 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
A0509 13 Rescan after resetting
Bar code mechanically. If this
Scanning too many or
sending message appears for 3
too fast
buffer is full times, contact the
developer
A05010 8 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
Execution again. Restore failure
result is not Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
received in is timed out Maint. page. If this
given time message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A05011 8 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
No again. Restore failure
response, Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
or response error Maint. page. If this
error message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer

9.2.2.6 Reaction Disk Unit


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A0601 8 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0602 8 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer

9-28 9 Troubleshooting
A0603 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0604 8 Reaction Reaction disk home Restore failure. If this
disk cannot position sensor message appears for 3
find home failure. Coder goes times, contact the
position wrong developer
A0605 8 Reaction
Restore failure. If this
disk missed
Motor failure. Belt message appears for 3
step when
failure times, contact the
moving
developer
horizontally
A0606 8 Reaction Restore failure. If this
disk sensor message appears for 3
Sensor failure
is in wrong times, contact the
status developer
A0608 9 No cuvette on a Load the cuvette or
Light signal specified position or contact the developer
too strong photoelectric gain and adjust
adjusting error photoelectric gain
A0609 9 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
Photoelectric Photoelectric buffer
on again. If this
buffer is overflow, or FIFO
message appears for 3
abnormal overflow
times, contact the
developer
A0610 1 After testing, switch off
analyzing unit power
Photoelectric
Photoelectric and switch on again. If
collection and
data error this message appears
conversion failed
for 3 times, contact the
developer
A0611 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
given time page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A0612 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
No on again. Restore
response, or Instruction execute failure on
response error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer

9 Troubleshooting 9-29
9.2.2.7 Mixer Unit
Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0801 6 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0802 6 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction operating software.
Instruction parameter does not Then retry this
parameter error comply with instruction. If this
protocol message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0803 6 Switch off analyzing
unit power and
switch on again.
Download
Unit is busy and parameters and
No execute
does not reset restore failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily
Maint. page. If this
message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0804 6 Switch off analyzing
unit power and
Wrong sensor switch on again.
status when Restore failure on
Vertical position
mixer moves Utilities-->Daily
sensor failure
vertically(other Maint. page. If this
position) message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0805 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and
Wrong sensor switch on again.
status when Restore failure on
Vertical position
mixer moves Utilities-->Daily
sensor failure
vertically(in Maint. page. If this
reaction disk) message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0806 6 Mixer cannot find
Vertical position Restore failure. If
home position
sensor failure. failed for 3 times,
when moving
Obstruction exists contact the
vertically(other
in vertical direction developer
position)
A0807 8 Mixer cannot find
Vertical position Restore failure. If
home position
sensor failure. failed for 3 times,
when moving
Obstruction exists contact the
vertically(in
in vertical direction developer
reaction disk)

9-30 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0808 6 Mixer is not in
Lowering down If auto reset fails,
vertical home
at current restore failure. If
position. Current
position is not failed for 3 times,
position is not
allowed(other contact the
proper for lowering
position) developer
down
A0809 8 Mixer is not in
Lowering down If auto reset fails,
vertical home
at current restore failure. If
position. Current
position is not failed for 3 times,
position is not
allowed(in contact the
proper for lowering
reaction disk) developer
down
A0810 6 Switch off analyzing
unit power and
Wrong sensor switch on again.
status when Restore failure on
Rotational position
mixer moves Utilities-->Daily
sensor failure
horizontally(other Maint. page. If this
position) message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0811 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and
Wrong sensor switch on again.
status when Restore failure on
Rotational position
mixer moves Utilities-->Daily
sensor failure
horizontally(in Maint. page. If this
reaction disk) message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0812 6 Mixer cannot find Rotational position
Restore failure. If
home position sensor failure.
failed for 3 times,
when moving Obstruction exists
contact the
horizontally(other in horizontal
developer
position) direction
A0813 8 Mixer cannot find Rotational position
Restore failure. If
home position sensor failure.
failed for 3 times,
when moving Obstruction exists
contact the
horizontally(in in horizontal
developer
reaction disk) direction
A0814 6 Mixer is not in
If auto reset fails,
Rotating at horizontal home
restore failure. If
current height is position. Current
failed for 3 times,
not allowed(other height is not proper
contact the
position) for rotation(highest
developer
position)
A0815 8 Mixer is not in
If auto reset fails,
Rotating at horizontal home
restore failure. If
current height is position. Current
failed for 3 times,
not allowed(in height is not proper
contact the
reaction disk) for rotation(highest
developer
position)

9 Troubleshooting 9-31
Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
A0816 8 Switch off analyzing
unit power and
switch on again.
Execution result Instruction Restore failure on
is not received in execution is timed Utilities-->Daily
given time out Maint. page. If this
message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
A0817 6 Switch off analyzing
unit power and
switch on again.
Restore failure on
No response, or Instruction execute
Utilities-->Daily
response error error
Maint. page. If this
message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer

9.2.2.8 Temperature Unit


Error Code Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective
Actions
A0901 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Instruction format operating
Instruction format error. Invalid software.
error information is Then retry this
included instruction. If
this message
appears for 3
times, contact
the developer
A0902 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Instruction operating
Instruction parameter does software.
parameter error not comply with Then retry this
protocol instruction. If
this message
appears for 3
times, contact
the developer

9-32 9 Troubleshooting
Error Code Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective
Actions
A0903 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Unit is busy.
operating
Instruction
No execute software.
conflicts.
condition Then retry this
Instruction buffer
instruction. If
is full
this message
appears for 3
times, contact
the developer
A0904 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Reaction disk Reaction disk operating
temperature is too temperature software. If
high collection error this message
appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer
A0905 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Preheat operating
Wash solution is
temperature software. If
too hot
collection error this message
appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer
A0906 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Reaction disk Reaction disk operating
temperature is temperature software. If
fluctuated collection error this message
appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer

9 Troubleshooting 9-33
Error Code Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective
Actions
A0907 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Wash solution Preheat operating
temperature is temperature software. If
fluctuated collection error this message
appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer
A0908 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Reaction disk
Reaction disk operating
temperature
temperature software. If
control is switched
collection error this message
off
appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer
A0909 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
restart
Wash solution
Preheat operating
temperature
temperature software. If
control is switched
collection error this message
off
appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer
A0910 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
Reaction disk restart
Reaction disk
temperature operating
temperature is not
collection error. software. If
steady in
Heater control this message
specified time
error appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer
A0911 0 Reset
analyzing unit
power and
Preheat restart
Wash solution
temperature operating
temperature is not
collection error. software. If
steady in
Heater control this message
specified time
error appears
repeatedly,
contact the
developer

9-34 9 Troubleshooting
Error Code Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective
Actions
A0912 0 Contact
Refrigerator fans Fan circuit failed.
instrument
are abnormal Fan is damaged
developer
A0913 8 Switch off
analyzing unit
power and
switch on
Execution result is Instruction again.
not received in execution is timed Restore
given time out failure. If this
message
appears for 3
times, contact
the developer
A0914 8 Switch off
analyzing unit
power and
switch on
again.
No response, or Instruction
Restore
response error execute error
failure. If this
message
appears for 3
times, contact
the developer
A0915 0 Reaction disk
Reaction disk
temperature Contact
temperature
sensor is instrument
sensor is not
disconnected or developer
connected
damaged
A0916 0 Wash solution
Wash solution
temperature Contact
temperature
sensor is instrument
sensor is not
disconnected or developer
connected
damaged
A0924 0 DI water
DI water
temperature Contact
temperature
sensor is instrument
sensor is not
disconnected or developer
connected
damaged
A0925 0 Environment
Environment
temperature Contact
temperature
sensor is instrument
sensor is not
disconnected or developer
connected
damaged

9 Troubleshooting 9-35
9.2.2.9 Wash Unit
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message

A1001 7 Reset analyzing unit


power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A1002 7 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A1003 7 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
page. If this message
appears for 3 times,
contact the developer
A1004 7 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction
Wash unit is busy or Then retry this
execution
abnormal instruction. If this
is timed out
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A1005 8 Wash unit If auto reset fails,
cannot restore failure. Remove
Obstruction exists in
reach obstruction and reset. If
vertical direction
home problem remains,
position contact the developer
A1006 7 If auto reset fails,
Wash unit
restore failure. Remove
cannot Obstruction exists in
obstruction and reset. If
leave home vertical direction
problem remains,
position
contact the developer
A1007 8 Remove foreign
matters, and restore
Wash unit bumps. failure on
Wash unit
Obstruction exists. Utilities-->Daily Maint.
bumps
Mechanical failure page. If problem
remains, contact the
developer

9-36 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message

A1008 7 Remove foreign


matters, and restore
Wash unit
ash unit bumps. failure on
vertical
Obstruction exists. Utilities-->Daily Maint.
adjustment
Mechanical failure page. If problem
failed
remains, contact the
developer
A1009 7 Syringe Restore failure. If failure
cannot find happens 3 consecutive
Syringe sensor failure
home times, contact the
position developer
A1010 7 Syringe Restore failure. If failure
cannot happens 3 consecutive
Syringe sensor failure
leave home times, contact the
position developer
A1011 7 Syringe
Restore failure. If failure
return to
happens 3 consecutive
home Syringe sensor failure
times, contact the
position
developer
failed
A1012 0 High-conce
High-concentration
ntration
waste is full, or Check and empty the
waste
high-concentration high-concentration
bucket
waste bucket sensor waste tank
level is too
goes wrong
high
A1013 7 Wash
Out of wash solution Troubleshoot
solution
or wash solution component failure and
tank level is
sensor abnormal add wash solution
too low
A1014 14 Water treatment
system abnormal.
DI water
Electromagnetic
tank level is Troubleshoot failures
valve failure. Sensor
too low
failure or valves
abnormal
A1015 14 Low-conce
Gravity Check
ntration
low-concentration low-concentration
waste
waste overflows waste1 outlet
overflows
A1016 8 Switch off analyzing unit
No
power and switch on
execution
again. Restore failure
result is
Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
received
is timed out Maint. page. If this
within
message appears for 3
specified
times, contact the
time
developer

9 Troubleshooting 9-37
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message

A1017 8 Switch off analyzing unit


power and switch on
No
again. Restore failure
response,
Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
or
error Maint. page. If this
response
message appears for 3
error
times, contact the
developer
A1018 0 Low-conce Gravity Unblock
ntration low-concentration low-concentration
waste full waste full waste1 outlet
A1019 0 Wash
solution Insufficient wash
Add wash solution
bottle level solution
low

9.2.2.10 ISE Unit


Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A1101 11 ISE unit Reconnect. Reset ISE
ISE unit connection
handshake is unit. Power on ISE unit
error
abnormal again
A1102 11 Wait a moment, and
ISE unit is ISE unit is executing
re-execute ISE
busy other instruction
instruction
A1103 11 Power switched off.
Communication Reconnect to power.
failed. Serial cable Reconnect serial cable.
ISE unit does damaged or Perform ISE
not respond unconnected. Module initialization. Contact the
connector damaged. developer to replace
Board elements board
damaged
A1104 11 Reinstall sensor.
Replace calibrant B and
Electrode installation
rerun, if still low, replace
incorrect. Calibrator
calibrant A and rerun.
expired. Electrode
Na+ Replace failed sensor
degenerated. Bubbles
electrode and rerun. Reinstall
in reference
slope is out of electrode, eliminate
electrode. Reference
standard bubbles and calibrate.
electrode damaged.
range Replace reference or
Electrodes interfered.
Na+ electrode and rerun.
Module or tubing
Monitor temperature, if
temperature above 37
too high, relocate
equipment
A1105 11 K+ electrode Electrode installation Reinstall sensor.
slope is out of incorrect. Calibrator Replace calibrant B and
standard expired. Electrode rerun, if still low, replace
range degenerated. Bubbles calibrant A and rerun.
in reference Replace failed sensor

9-38 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
electrode. Reference and rerun. Reinstall
electrode damaged. electrode, eliminate
Electrodes interfered. bubbles and calibrate.
Module or tubing Replace reference or K+
temperature above 37 electrode and rerun.
Monitor temperature, if
too high, relocate
equipment
A1106 11 Reinstall sensor.
Replace calibrant B and
Electrode installation
rerun, if still low, replace
incorrect. Calibrator
calibrant A and rerun.
expired. Electrode
Replace failed sensor
Cl- electrode degenerated. Bubbles
and rerun. Reinstall
slope is out of in reference
electrode, eliminate
standard electrode. Reference
bubbles and calibrate.
range electrode damaged.
Replace reference or Cl-
Electrodes interfered.
electrode and rerun.
Module or tubing
Monitor temperature, if
temperature above 37
too high, relocate
equipment
A1108 11 Replace electrode and
Na+ Electrode rerun. Check for
electrode degenerated. Noise electrical noise. If board
noise error spike interference element is damaged,
replace the board
A1109 11 Replace electrode and
Electrode rerun. Check for
K+ electrode
degenerated. Noise electrical noise. If board
noise error
spike interference element is damaged,
replace the board
A1110 11 Replace electrode and
Electrode rerun. Check for
Cl- electrode
degenerated. Noise electrical noise. If board
noise error
spike interference element is damaged,
replace the board
A1112 11 Replace reference
Reference electrode electrode and rerun.
Na+, K+, Cl- degenerated. Check for electrical
electrodes Environment noise. Check unit
noise error interfered by electrical grounding. If board
noise spike element is damaged,
replace the board
A1113 11 Replace failed electrode
and run. Check calibrant
Electrode
A channel and
Na+ degenerated. New
recalibrate. In case of
electrode drift electrode or new
new electrode, drift may
calibrant A is used
occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
A1114 11 K+ electrode Electrode Replace failed electrode
drift degenerated. New and run. Check calibrant
electrode or new A channel and

9 Troubleshooting 9-39
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
calibrant A is used recalibrate. In case of
new electrode, drift may
occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
A1115 11 Replace failed electrode
and run. Check calibrant
Electrode
A channel and
Cl- electrode degenerated. New
recalibrate. In case of
drift electrode or new
new electrode, drift may
calibrant A is used
occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
A1117 11 Replace reference
Reference electrode
electrode and rerun.
degenerated.
Na+, K+, Cl- Check for electrical
Environmental electric
electrodes noise. If board element
pulse. New electrode
drift is damaged, replace the
or new calibrant A is
board. Check calibrant A
used
channel and recalibrate
A1118 11 Replace failed electrode
and run. Check calibrant
Na+ Electrode
A channel and
electrode degenerated. New
recalibrate. In case of
voltage electrode or new
new electrode, drift may
overflow calibrant A is used
occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
A1119 11 Replace failed electrode
and run. Check calibrant
Electrode
K+ electrode A channel and
degenerated. New
voltage recalibrate. In case of
electrode or new
overflow new electrode, drift may
calibrant A is used
occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
A1120 11 Replace failed electrode
and run. Check calibrant
Electrode
Cl- electrode A channel and
degenerated. New
voltage recalibrate. In case of
electrode or new
overflow new electrode, drift may
calibrant A is used
occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
A1122 11 Replace reference
Reference electrode electrode and rerun.
Na+, K+, Cl- degenerated. Check for electrical
electrodes Environmental electric noise. If board element
voltage pulse. New electrode is damaged, replace the
overflow or new calibrant A is board. Check calibrator
used A channel and
recalibrate
A1123 3 If sample is less than
Insufficient sample.
70µl, increase sample
Sample not aspirated
volume. Fill sufficient
to measurement
Air in sample sample in tube. In case
chamber. Tubing
of wrong electrode
aged. Pump tubing
installation, install again.
clogged or too long
Replace the tubing

9-40 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A1124 11 Check spring/sealing
ring. Ensure all
electrodes/O rings are
Calibrant A depleted.
correct. Launch a wash
Tubing unconnected.
procedure. Disassemble
Calibrant A pump
the unit and reinstall
failure. Tubing
sensor. Replace bubble
Air in clogged/cracked/bent.
detector, waste pump, or
calibrant A Fibrin and salt in
calibrant A and
electrode tubing.
recalibrate.
Bubble detector
Reconnect/replace
failure. Waste pump
tubing. Check electrical
failure
connection. Replace
pump housing, motor, or
tubing
A1125 11 In case of wrong
electrode installation,
check spring and sealing
ring. Ensure all
Air in calibrant B.
electrodes and O rings
Fibrin and salt in
are installed correctly.
Air in electrode tubing.
Press Clean on water
calibrant B Bubble detector
treatment system to
failure. Waste pump
wash. Disassemble this
failure
unit and wash and
reinstall sensor. Replace
bubble detector. Replace
waste pump.
A1126 11 In case of wrong
electrode installation,
check spring and sealing
ring. Ensure all
Air in calibrant B and
electrodes and O rings
A. Fibrin and salt in
are installed correctly.
electrode tubing.
Air in cleaner Press Clean on water
Bubble detector
treatment system to
failure. Waste pump
wash. Disassemble this
failure
unit and wash and
reinstall sensor. Replace
bubble detector. Replace
waste pump.
A1127 11 Calibrator A/B Replace reagent
No fluid in
depleted. No sample package. Check the
tubing
or cleaning solution tubing
A1128 11 Instruction format
Instruction Please contact the
error, or parameter
execute error developer
error
A1129 11 Calibrations ISE unit cannot store
Recalibrate
saving error calibration results

9 Troubleshooting 9-41
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
A1130 11 Bubble
Bubble detector is Replace the bubble
detector
damaged detector
failure

A1131 11
Calibrate repeatedly. If
Electrode slope is out problem remains,
Calibration
of range during reinstall failed electrode.
failed
calibration If problem still remains,
replace the electrode

A1132 11 If maintaining, send


instruction again, if
Instruction format
testing, rerun. Otherwise
Instruction error. Parameter
restart operation unit and
execute error error. No execute
analyzing unit. If this
condition
problem remains,
contact the developer

A1133 11 Switch off analyzing unit


power and switch on
Execution
again. Restore failure on
result is not Instruction execution
Utilities-->Daily Maint.If
received in is timed out
this message appears
given time
for 3 times, contact the
developer

A1134 11 Switch off analyzing unit


power and switch on
No response, again. Restore failure on
Instruction execute
or response Utilities-->Daily Maint.If
error
error this message appears
for 3 times, contact the
developer

A1135 0 Reinstall sensor.


Electrode installation
Replace calibrant B and
incorrect. Calibrator
rerun, if still low, replace
expired. Electrode
calibrant A and rerun.
Samples for degenerated. Bubbles
Replace failed sensor
Na+ in reference
and rerun. Reinstall
electrode are electrode. Reference
electrode, eliminate
out of electrode goes wrong.
bubbles and calibrate.
measurement Electrodes interfered.
Replace reference or
range Module or tubing
Na+ electrode and rerun.
temperature above
Monitor temperature, if
37. Sample goes
too high, relocate
wrong
equipment
A1136 0 Electrode installation Reinstall sensor.
Samples for incorrect. Calibrator Replace calibrant B and
K+ electrode expired. Electrode rerun, if still low, replace
are out of degenerated. Bubbles calibrant A and rerun.
measurement in reference Replace failed sensor
range electrode. Reference and rerun. Reinstall
electrode goes wrong. electrode, eliminate

9-42 9 Troubleshooting
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
Electrodes interfered. bubbles and calibrate.
Module or tubing Replace reference or K+
temperature above electrode and rerun.
37. Sample goes Monitor temperature, if
wrong too high, relocate
equipment
A1137 0 Reinstall sensor.
Electrode installation
Replace calibrant B and
incorrect. Calibrator
rerun, if still low, replace
expired. Electrode
calibrant A and rerun.
degenerated. Bubbles
Samples for Replace failed sensor
in reference
Cl- electrode and rerun. Reinstall
electrode. Reference
are out of electrode, eliminate
electrode goes wrong.
measurement bubbles and calibrate.
Electrodes interfered.
range Replace reference or Cl-
Module or tubing
electrode and rerun.
temperature above
Monitor temperature, if
37. Sample goes
too high, relocate
wrong
equipment
A1139 11 Reagent pack is not
Reagent Check the reagent pack
installed, or reagent
module does installation, or replace it
pack is not connected
not exist with a new one
correctly

9.2.2.11 Others
Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message

A1401 8 Undefined Generated error Upgrade the operating


failure code is out of software, or contact the
defined range service engineer

9 Troubleshooting 9-43
For Your Notes

9-44 9 Troubleshooting
10 Calculation Methods

10.1 Reaction Types


The system provides three reaction types for measurement:

 Endpoint
 Fixed-time
 Kinetic

10.1.1 Endpoint
The endpoint or, more correctly, equilibrium method, is the most ideal. The reaction
reaches equilibrium after a period of time. Because the equilibrium constant is very
large, it can be considered that all substrates (analytes) have changed into
products, and absorbance of the reactant does not change any more. The
absorbance change is directly proportional to the analytes concentration.

The endpoint reaction is largely insensitive to minor changes in such condition


changes as amount of enzyme, pH value and temperature, provided the changes
are not significant enough to affect the reaction time.

10 Calculation Methods 10-1


10.1.1.1 Single-reagent
Figure 10-1 Single-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve

As shown in Figure 10-1, R1 is the time when reagent is added and is the time
when the sample is added. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the
absorbance reading is taken. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

 On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:


Reaction time: L and 1≤N≤P<L≤M≤61; M-4≤L; L>11
M
Reagent blank time: P-4≤N or N=P=0;
N and P
N>12 or P<11

 To calculate reaction absorbance Ai,


If L=M Enter two Ms. One measuring point is applied. The
reaction absorbance is the absorbance at M, that is, Ai
=AM.
If L=M-1 Enter M-1 and M. Two measuring points are applied.
The reaction absorbance is the average of absorbance
AM  AM 1
at M-1 and M, that is, Ai= .
2
If L=M-2 Enter M-2 and M. Three measuring points are applied.
The reaction absorbance is the remaining one when the
maximum and minimum absorbance is removed.
If L=M-3 or L=M-4 Enter M-3 and M or M-4 and M. Four or five measuring
points are applied. The reaction absorbance is the
average of remaining absorbance when the maximum
and minimum ones are removed.

 To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab,


Follow the Ai calculation steps stated above.

Reaction response calculation: R  Ai  k1 Ab

VR1
k1 
If P≤12, then VR1  VS ; if N>12, then k1=1; if N=P=0, then k1=0.

10-2 10 Calculation Methods


VR1
Where, k1  is a volume correction factor for single-reagent analysis.
VR1  VS
VR1 and VS are volumes of first reagent and sample. K1Ab is reagent blank
correction value.

Reagent blank absorbance can be subtracted from the reaction absorbance but
sample blank cannot. To correct the response with sample blank, you should
request sample blank separately, whose response is Rsb  Ai  k1 Ab . The
response after being corrected by sample blank is R
'
 R  RSb .

10.1.1.2 Double-reagent
Figure 10-2 Double-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve

As shown in Figure 10-2, R1is the time when the first reagent is added, S is the
time when the sample is added, and R2 is the time when the second reagent is
added. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the absorbance reading is
taken. The sample blank is tested during N and P.

 On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:


Reaction time: [L][M] 11<N≤P<L≤M≤61; M-4≤L; L>36
Reagent blank time: P-4≤N or N=P=0;
[N][P]
N>36 or P≤36

 To calculate reaction absorbance Ai, follow the relevant steps stated in


10.1.1.1 Single-reagent.
 To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab, follow the relevant steps stated in
10.1.1.1 Single-reagent.
Calculate the reaction response using the following equation:

 R  Ai  k2 Ab
VR1  VS
If P≤42, then k2  ; if N>42, then k2=1; if N=P=0, then k2=0.
VR1  VS  VR 2
VR1  VS
Where, K2Ab is sample blank correction value. k2  is a volume
VR1  VS  VR 2
correction factor for double-reagent analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first
reagent, sample and second reagent.

10 Calculation Methods 10-3


10.1.2 Fixed-time
For the fixed-time reaction method (namely, first-order kinetic method or initial rate
method), the reaction velocity (v) within a specific period, is directly proportional to
the substrate concentration [S], namely, v=k[S]. As the substrate is consumed
continuously, the reaction velocity becomes smaller and smaller, and so does the
absorbance change rate. It takes much time for such a reaction to reach
equilibrium. Theoretically, the absorbance reading can be taken at any time. The
reaction can, however, become steady only after a delay because it is complicated
at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to complex serum
compositions.

For any first order reaction, the substrate concentration [S] at a given time after the
start of the reaction is given by the following:

S   S 0  e kt
Where,

 [S0] - Initial substrate concentration


 e - Base of the natural log
 k - Velocity constant
The change in substrate concentration Δ[S] over a fixed time interval, t1 to t 2 , is
related to [S0] by the following equation:

 [ S ]
[ S 0]   kt1  kt 2
e e

That is, within a fixed time interval, the change in substrate concentration is directly
proportional to its initial concentration. This is the general property of first-order
reactions. Within this interval, absorbance change is directly proportional to the
analytes concentration.

The fixed-time method is available in single-interval and double-interval according


to input mode of measuring points. Sample blank, namely, the absorbance change
at two points within the incubation time, is subtracted from the reaction absorbance
in double-interval reaction.

Substrate depletion can be checked in fixed-time reaction, and corresponding flag


will be marked in case of substrate depletion.

10.1.2.1 Single-reagent
Figure 10-3 Single-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve

As shown in Figure 10-3, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S
when sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at L
and M.

10-4 10 Calculation Methods


 On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:
Reaction time: L and 11 <L<M ≤61;
M
Reagent blank time: Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
N and P

 Reaction response calculation:


AM  AL
R
tM  t L

10.1.2.2 Double-reagent
Figure 10-4 Double-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve

As shown in Figure 10-4, R1, S and R2 are the time when first reagent, sample and
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are
respectively taken at L and M. The reagent blank is tested at N and P.

 On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:


Reaction time: L and M 36 <L<M ≤61
Single-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank N=P=0
[N][P]
Double-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank 11<N<P<36
[N][P]

 Reaction response calculation:


Single-interval A  AL
fixed-time R= M ;
tM  tL
Double-interval AM  AL A  AN
fixed-time R=  k2 P
tM  tL tP  tN

VR1  VS
Where, k2  is a volume correction factor for double-reagent
VR1  VS  VR 2
analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first reagent, sample and second
reagent.

10 Calculation Methods 10-5


10.1.3 Kinetic
For the kinetic method (namely, zero-order kinetic or continuous-monitoring
method), the reaction velocity is not related to substrate concentration and remains
constant during the reaction process. As a result, for a given wavelength, the
absorbance of the analytes changes evenly, and the change rate (A/min) is
directly proportional to the activity or concentration of the analytes. The kinetic
method is usually used to measure enzyme activity.

In fact, it is impossible for the substrate concentration to be high enough, and the
reaction will be no longer a zero-order reaction when the substrate is consumed to
a certain degree. Therefore, the theory only stands within certain period. In addition,
the reaction can become steady only after a certain period of time, because the
reaction is complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due
to complex serum compositions.

In Kinetic reaction, the concentration or activity is obtained according to


absorbance change among specified measuring points.

The Kinetic method is available in single-interval Kinetic and double-interval Kinetic


according to input mode of measuring points.

10.1.3.1 Calculation Flow of Kinetic Method


Figure 10-5 Calculation Flow in Kinetic Reaction

10.1.3.2 Determination of Linearity Range


The absorbance linearity range should be determined based on the substrate
depletion limit.

You should determine the linearity range within the reaction time other than the
reagent blank period.

10-6 10 Calculation Methods


Figure 10-6 Linearity Range Determination of Kinetic Method (Increased Reaction)

Figure 10-7 Linearity Range of Kinetic Method (Increased Reaction)

Figure 10-6 shows the linearity range determination process for increased reaction.
In decreased reaction, the “≤” in Figure 10-6 should be changed into “≥”.

 The number of measuring points (N) in substrate limit should be counted.


If N>=3, The linearity range includes all measuring points from
reaction start point to substrate depletion point. Otherwise
“NLN” alarm message is displayed.

10 Calculation Methods 10-7


If N=0 or N=1, No calculation is performed and only alarm message is
displayed.
If N=2 or N=3, An alarm message is displayed. Two or three measuring
points are applied to calculate the reaction response.

10.1.3.3 Response Calculation


Single-reagent
Figure 10-8 Single-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve

As shown in Figure 10-8, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S
when sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken during L and M.

 On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:


Reaction time: L and M 11<L<M ≤61;
Reagent blank time: N Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
and P

 Reaction response calculation:


R=⊿ALM

⊿ is the absorbance change rate per minute (slope of reaction curve) during L
and M and calculated by the least squares method.

Double-reagent
Figure 10-9 Double-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve

As shown in Figure 10-9, R1, S and R2 are the time when first reagent, sample and
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken
during L and M. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

10-8 10 Calculation Methods


 On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:
Reaction time: L and M 36<L≤M≤61
Single-interval kinetic: Reagent blank [N][P] N=P=0
Double-interval kinetic: Reagent blank [N][P] 11<N<P<36

 Reaction response calculation:


R=⊿ALM-K2⊿ANP

10.1.3.4 Linearity Check

A f  Ab
Linearity= 100  Linearity Limit
Au ,v

Where, A f , Ab and Au ,v are the absorbance change rates at the
beginning and end of reaction, and of all measuring points. These three values are
calculated based on the number of measuring points within the linearity range.

When N>9, A f is the absorbance change rate of first 6


measuring points, Ab of last 6 measuring
points, and Au ,v of all measuring points.
When 4  N  8 , A f is the absorbance change rate of first 3
measuring points, Ab of last 3 measuring
points, and Au ,v of all measuring points.

When N  3 Linearity is not checked.

When Linearity is not checked.


A f  Ab  0.006A/minute

or Au ,v  0.006A/minute,

10 Calculation Methods 10-9


10.1.3.5 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension
Figure 10-10 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension

During the high-activity enzyme test, the substrate may be depleted quickly and the
reaction curve will appear obviously nonlinear (a smooth curve). If measurement is
performed by the ordinary procedure, the “No linear interval” alarm will be triggered,
reminding user to rerun the test after diluting the sample. This will more or less
bring troubles to user.

The system provides the enzyme linearity range extension function, which is
introduced as follows:

When the number of measuring points (N) within the main read time is less than 2,
the enzyme linearity range extension can be implemented.

The maximum reaction rate (⊿Amax) is calculated based on all measuring points
which include that within the lag time and then considered as the response of the
sample. If less than 2 measuring points during the lag time experience substrate
depletion, no result will be calculated and “ENC (No calculation interval)” is flagged.

⊿Amax is calculated as follows:

If the reaction start time is t1, reaction time is tL-tM, then t1-tL is the lag time. If the
valid measuring points(N<2) within tL-tM are too few to calculate the response, the
reaction rate can be calculated based on all measuring points during t1-tM using
the formula: ⊿A=(Ai + 1-Ai)/(ti + 1 -ti). (i=1, 2…M)The maximum ⊿A, namely
⊿Amax, is taken as the response of the sample. Therefore, the enzyme linearity
range is extended via the lag time.

10.2 Prozone Check


During reaction of antigen and antibody, the amount of generated insoluble
compound is closely related to the proportion between antigen and antibody. When
antigen and antibody is proportioned properly, maximum amount of insoluble
compound is generated, that is, least light is passed and absorbance is the highest.
Otherwise, amount of insoluble compound is reduced, more light is passed, and
absorbance is decreased. Therefore, very high concentration samples may
produce insoluble compound equivalent to low samples and thus an incorrect
result can be reported. The antigen-antibody dose reaction is shown in Figure
10-11.

10-10 10 Calculation Methods


Prozone check is used for Endpoint analysis only.

Figure 10-11 Antigen-antibody Dose Reaction Curve

10.2.1 Reaction Rate Method


Figure 10-12 Antibody Excess Reaction Curve

10 Calculation Methods 10-11


Figure 10-13 Antigen excess reaction curve

The reaction rate method is based on the specified time, in which antibody excess
reaction can reach equilibrium (Figure 10-12) but antigen excess reaction cannot
(Figure 10-13). Prozone check is performed using the following parameters:

 Measuring points: Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4


 Prozone limit: PC;
 Absorbance low limit for prozone check: ABS
Aq 4  Aq 3
q 4  q3
 Sample PC  . If PC>PCM, “PRO” flag is marked.
Aq 2  Aq1
q 2  q1
Enter measuring points as follows:

For single-reagent 11<q1<q2<q3<q4<=Reaction end point<=61.


test,
For 36<q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 61.
double-reagent
test,

Prozone check will not be performed if:

(1) End point absorbance A is less than absorbance low limit in increased
reaction or greater than that in decreased reaction;
(2) Absolute value of response R is greater than RCMAX (absolute value of
response of most-concentrated calibrator).

10-12 10 Calculation Methods


Appendix A Fluidic Schematic Diagram

SV8

05 06 07
Reagent
syringe

SV7
Reaction C3 C2 C4
02 03 04
Sample Reagent Reagent Sample Reagent disk
probe probe 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
mixer mixer disk
Sample
syrine
W10

D10 D8 C5 C8 C7 C6 C1
CV4 D11 D12 W8
CV3
CV2 CV1
S/R probe ext
SV6 D9 D7
wash pump
NC
P1 COM NO D3 D4 Low-conc. High-conc.
01 D6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 waste waste
W4 W5 W6 W7 W9 W12
pump pump
D2

Int P2
Mixer ext W3
wash P8 P7 P6 P5 P4
pump D5 D1 wash pump
S5 2
16 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9
Waste conflux G16 1

tank G17 15 14
G9 G18
G12 G4 13
SV3 SV2 SV1
G8 G11 G3
G14 G15 G13
G7 G10
1 2 3 4 5 6
DI water
preheat W1 W2
J4
J9 G6
J6 J7

Water inlet
5-way
G2

J3 J5 Wash
SV4
solution Graphic Symbols
preheat NC
S3
3-way solenoid Check valve 2-way solenoid
J2 COM NO
valve valve Panel
S2DI water
G706
Low-conc. Low-conc.
J1 G1 S4
waste outlet 1 waste outlet 2
Syringe Floater Filter G704 G705
Water Panel Wash solution
treatment G703
bucket
system inlet S1
G701 G702 Fluid pump Wash well
High-conc.
waste bucket
F2

Appendix A Fluidic Schematic Diagram A-1


For Your Notes

A-2 Appendix A Fluidic Schematic Diagram


P/N: 046-002179-00 (3.0)

You might also like